You are on page 1of 268

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches

Product Fundamentals
SAOS 6.12
Whats inside...
New in this release
Documentation roadmap
39XX/51XX overview
SAOS software
3902 Service Delivery Switch
3911 Service Delivery Switch
3916 Service Delivery Switch
3920 Service Delivery Switch
3930 Service Delivery Switch
3931 Service Delivery Switch
3932 Service Delivery Switch
3940 Service Delivery Switch
3960 Service Delivery Switch
5140 Service Aggregation Switch
5142 Service Aggregation Switch
5150 Service Aggregation Switch
5160 Service Aggregation Switch
Default configuration overview
Console port overview
Alarms
External timing

009-3240-006 - Standard Revision A


May 2014
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation. All rights reserved.
LEGAL NOTICES
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET INFORMATION OF CIENA
CORPORATION AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE
OR DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE, OR SELL ANYTHING THAT IT MAY DESCRIBE.
REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE, OR USE IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN
AUTHORIZATION OF CIENA CORPORATION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.
EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS
COMPLETE AND ACCURATE AT THE TIME OF PUBLISHING; HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE.
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly
agreed to in writing CIENA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are
subject to change without notice.
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation. All Rights Reserved
The material contained in this document is also protected by copyright laws of the United States of America and
other countries. It may not be reproduced or distributed in any form by any means, altered in any fashion, or stored
in a data base or retrieval system, without express written permission of the Ciena Corporation.
Security
Ciena cannot be responsible for unauthorized use of equipment and will not make allowance or credit for
unauthorized use or access.
Contacting Ciena

Corporate Headquarters 410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144 www.ciena.com


Customer Technical Support/Warranty
In North America 1-800-CIENA24 (243-6224)
410-865-4961
In Europe, Middle East, 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
and Africa +44-207-012-5508
In Asia-Pacific 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
+81-3-6367-3989
+91-124-4340-600
In Caribbean and Latin 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
America 410-865-4944 (USA)
Sales and General Information 410-694-5700 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In North America 410-694-5700 or 800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Europe +44-207-012-5500 (UK) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Asia +81-3-3248-4680 (Japan) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In India +91-124-434-0500 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Latin America 011-5255-1719-0220 (Mexico City) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
Training 877-CIENA-TD (243-6283) E-mail: techtng@ciena.com
or 410-865-8996
For additional office locations and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT (AGREEMENT) CAREFULLY BEFORE
INSTALLING OR USING CIENA CORPORATION (Ciena) SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DOCUMENTATION
(COLLECTIVELY, THE EQUIPMENT).
BY INSTALLING OR USING THE EQUIPMENT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS
AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
1. Right to Use License; Restrictions. Subject to these terms, and the payment of all applicable license fees,
Ciena grants to you, as end user, a non-exclusive license to use the Ciena software (the Software) in object code
form solely in connection with, and as embedded within, the Equipment,. You shall have the right to use the
Software solely for your own internal use and benefit. You may make one copy of the Software and documentation
solely for backup and archival purpose, however you must reproduce and affix all copyright and other proprietary
rights notices that appear in or on the original. You may not, without Ciena's prior written consent, (i) sublicense,
assign, sell, rent, lend, lease, transfer or otherwise distribute the Software; (ii) grant any rights in the Software or
documentation not expressly authorized herein; (iii) modify the Software nor provide any third person the means to
do the same; (iv) create derivative works, translate, disassemble, recompile, reverse engineer or attempt to obtain
the source code of the Software in any way; or (v) alter, destroy, or otherwise remove any proprietary notices or
labels on or embedded within the Software or documentation. You acknowledge that this license is subject to
Section 365 of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code and requires Ciena's consent to any assignment related to a bankruptcy
proceeding. Sole title to the Software and documentation, to any derivative works, and to any associated patents
and copyrights, remains with Ciena or its licensors. Ciena reserves to itself and its licensors all rights in the
Software and documentation not expressly granted to you. You shall preserve intact any notice of copyright,
trademark, logo, legend or other notice of ownership from any original or copies of the Software or documentation.
2. Audit: Upon Ciena's reasonable request, but not more frequently than annually without reasonable cause, you
shall permit Ciena to audit the use of the Software at such times as may be mutually agreed upon to ensure
compliance with this Agreement.
3. Confidentiality. You agree that you will receive confidential or proprietary information (Confidential Information)
in connection with the purchase, deployment and use of the Equipment. You will not disclose Confidential
Information to any third party without prior written consent of Ciena, will use it only for purposes for which it was
disclosed, use your best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software from unauthorized disclosure or
use, and must treat it with the same degree of care as you do your own similar information, but with no less than
reasonable care. You acknowledge that the design and structure of the Software constitute trade secrets and/or
copyrighted materials of Ciena and agree that the Equipment is Confidential Information for purposes of this
Agreement.
4. U.S. Government Use. The Software is provided to the Government only with restricted rights and limited rights.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 52-227-14 and
52-227-19 or DFARS Section 52.227-7013(C)(1)(ii), as applicable. The Equipment and any accompanying technical
data (collectively Materials) are commercial within the meaning of applicable Federal acquisition regulations.
These Materials were developed fully at private expense. U.S. Government use of the Materials is restricted by this
Agreement, and all other U.S. Government use is prohibited. In accordance with FAR 12.212 and DFAR
Supplement 227.7202, software delivered to you is commercial computer software and the use of that software is
further restricted by this Agreement.
5. Term of License. This license is effective until terminated. Customer may terminate this license at any time by
giving written notice to Ciena [or] and destroying or erasing all copies of Software including any documentation.
Ciena may terminate this Agreement and your license to the Software immediately by giving you written notice of
termination in the event that either (i) you breach any term or condition of this Agreement or (ii) you are wound up
other than voluntarily for the purposes of amalgamation or reorganization, have a receiver appointed or enter into
liquidation or bankruptcy or analogous process in your home country. Termination shall be without prejudice to any
other rights or remedies Ciena may have. In the event of any termination you will have no right to keep or use the
Software or any copy of the Software for any purpose and you shall destroy and erase all copies of such Software in
its possession or control, and forward written certification to Ciena that all such copies of Software have been
destroyed or erased.
6. Compliance with laws. You agree to comply with all applicable laws, including all import regulations, and to
obtain all required licenses and permits related to installation and use of Equipment. Software, including technical
data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated
regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply
strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-
export, or import Software.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
7. Limitation of Liability. ANY LIABILITY OF Ciena SHALL BE LIMITED IN THE AGGREGATE TO THE
AMOUNTS PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS. THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION ALSO APPLY TO ANY THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER OF Ciena. NEITHER Ciena
NOR ANY OF ITS THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS OR DAMAGE,
WHETHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY
LOST PROFITS, CONTRACTS, DATA OR PROGRAMS, AND THE COST OF RECOVERING SUCH DATA OR
PROGRAMS, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ADVANCE
8. General. Ciena may assign this Agreement to any Ciena affiliate or to a purchaser of the intellectual property
rights in the Software, but otherwise neither this Agreement nor any rights hereunder may be assigned nor duties
delegated by either party, and any attempt to do so will be void. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Maryland (without regard to the conflict of laws provisions) and shall be enforceable in the courts of
Maryland. The U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply hereto. This
Agreement constitutes the complete and exclusive statement of agreement between the parties relating to the
license for the Software and supersedes all proposals, communications, purchase orders, and prior agreements,
verbal or written, between the parties. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining
provisions shall remain in full force and effect.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
v

Publication History 0

May 2014
Revision A, Standard

First Standard release of this document for SAOS 6.12.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
vi Publication History

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
vii

About this document 0

This document provides an overview of the products in the 39XX/51XX


Service Delivery and Aggregation switches portfolio, including descriptions of
hardware, software, and documentation.

Conventions used in this document


Hyperlinks are indicated by blue text in this document.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
viii About this document

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
ix

Contents 0

About this document vii

New in this release 1-1

Documentation roadmap 2-1


Intended audience 2-1
Roadmap 2-1
Ciena Customer Service 2-8
Ciena Specialist Services 2-8
Getting documentation 2-8

39XX/51XX overview 3-1


Edge devices 3-3
Aggregation devices 3-5
Network interfaces 3-6
External switch interfaces 3-6
OneControl Unified Management System 3-9
Ethernet Services Manager 3-9
Sample configurations 3-9
Business services 3-10
Mobile backhaul 3-10
Purpose-built private networks 3-11
Cloud access 3-11

SAOS software 4-1


Software management and licensing 4-1
Software management 4-1
Software licensing 4-1
Administration 4-2
System setup 4-2
System access 4-3
System shell operations 4-3
Data collection and management 4-3
Security 4-3
User configuration and management 4-3
User and user access security 4-3
Secure communications and infrastructure 4-4

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
x Contents

Configuration 4-5
Configuration management 4-5
Port management 4-5
Hardware resource management 4-5
System timing configuration 4-6
Link Layer Discovery Protocol configuration 4-6
Virtual Local Area Network management 4-7
IP management 4-7
MEF Layer 2 Virtual Private Networks configuration 4-7
Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering implementation 4-8
Multiprotocol Label Switching configuration 4-9
L2 Control Frame Tunneling configuration 4-9
Quality of service configuration 4-10
Multicast services configuration 4-10
Pseudowire emulation services configuration 4-11
Fault management 4-11
Fault management by means of SNMP and RMON 4-11
Link and port configuration for fault management 4-11
Fault monitoring and analysis 4-13
Connectivity Fault Management configuration 4-14
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol configuration 4-14
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configuration 4-15
Ethernet Ring Protection Switching configuration 4-16
Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance configuration 4-16
Event logging configuration 4-17
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection 4-17
Virtual Link Loss Indicator 4-18
Fault management troubleshooting 4-19
Performance management 4-19
TWAMP 4-19
CPU rate limiting 4-20
Performance benchmarking 4-20
Operational roles 4-20
Performance monitoring 4-22

3902 Service Delivery Switch 5-1


Hardware Overview 5-2
Chassis Size and Weight 5-2
Mounting 5-3
Power Options 5-4
Environmental Control 5-4
Grounding 5-4
Resets 5-5
Default Configuration 5-5
Interfaces 5-6

3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-1


Hardware Overview 6-1
3911 Enclosure and System 6-4

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
Contents xi

UAM 6-6
UAM Conduit Adapter Kit (Optional) 6-7
Line Protection Modules 6-8
Optical UNI Module 6-9
Chassis Size and Weight 6-10
Mounting 6-11
Power Options 6-12
Environmental Control 6-14
Grounding a Standalone 3911 System 6-14
Grounding a 3911 and UAM System 6-15
Resets 6-18
Default Configuration 6-19
Interfaces 6-19

3916 Service Delivery Switch 7-1


Hardware Overview 7-2
Chassis Size and Weight 7-4
Mounting 7-5
Power Options 7-7
Environmental Control 7-10
Grounding 7-11
Resets 7-12
Default Configuration 7-13
Interfaces 7-13

3920 Service Delivery Switch 8-1


Hardware Overview 8-1
Chassis Size and Weight 8-2
Mounting 8-3
Power 8-3
Environmental Control 8-4
Grounding 8-5
Resets 8-6
Default Configuration 8-6
Interfaces 8-6

3930 Service Delivery Switch 9-1


Hardware Overview 9-3
Chassis Size and Weight 9-4
Mounting 9-5
Power Options 9-5
Environmental Control 9-9
Grounding 9-10
Resets 9-11
Default Configuration 9-14
Interfaces 9-14

3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-1


Hardware Overview 10-1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
xii Contents

3931 Enclosure 10-4


Chassis Size and Weight 10-5
Mounting 10-6
Electronics Module 10-8
Fiber Demarcation Kit (Optional) 10-9
Power Options 10-10
Grounding 10-13
Internal Alarms 10-14
Resets 10-16
Default Configuration 10-17
Interfaces 10-17

3932 Service Delivery Switch 11-1


Hardware Overview 11-2
Chassis Size and Weight 11-3
Mounting 11-4
Power Options 11-4
Environmental Control 11-8
Grounding 11-9
Resets 11-10
Default Configuration 11-12
Interfaces 11-12

3940 Service Delivery Switch 12-1


Hardware Overview 12-1
Chassis Size and Weight 12-3
Mounting 12-3
Power Options 12-3
Environmental Control 12-5
Grounding 12-6
Resets 12-7
Default Configuration 12-8
Interfaces 12-8

3960 Service Delivery Switch 13-1


Hardware Overview 13-1
Chassis Size and Weight 13-2
Mounting 13-3
Power Options 13-5
Environmental Control 13-8
Grounding 13-9
Resets 13-10
Default Configuration 13-11
Interfaces 13-11

5140 Service Aggregation Switch 14-1


Hardware Overview 14-1
Chassis Size and Weight 14-3
Mounting 14-3

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
Contents xiii

Power Options 14-4


Environmental Control 14-4
Grounding 14-5
Resets 14-6
Default Configuration 14-6
Interfaces 14-7

5142 Service Aggregation Switch 15-1


Hardware Overview 15-2
Chassis Size and Weight 15-3
Mounting 15-4
Power Options 15-4
Environmental Control 15-7
Grounding 15-8
Resets 15-10
Default Configuration 15-11
Interfaces 15-12

5150 Service Aggregation Switch 16-1


Hardware Overview 16-1
Chassis Size and Weight 16-6
Mounting 16-6
Power Options 16-7
Environmental Control 16-10
Grounding 16-11
Resets 16-13
Default Configuration 16-13
Interfaces 16-14

5160 Service Aggregation Switch 17-1


Hardware Overview 17-2
Chassis Size and Weight 17-3
Mounting 17-4
Power Options 17-4
Environmental Control 17-7
Grounding 17-8
Resets 17-10
Default Configuration 17-11
Interfaces 17-12

Default configuration overview 18-1

Alarms 19-1
Alarm Connection Summary 19-2
Alarm Circuit Guidelines 19-3
Alarm Sense Circuit 19-3
Alarm Circuit Voltage 19-3
Alarm Custom Pin-out (15-pin D-sub connector) 19-4
Alarm Custom Pin-out (26-pin D-sub connector) 19-5

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
xiv Contents

Terminal Block Alarm Inputs 19-6

External timing 20-1


Sync port 20-3
1 PPS 20-6
10 MHz 20-7

Console port overview 21-1


Serial EIA-232 on DB-9 21-2
DB-9 console cable 21-3
Serial EIA-561 on RJ-45 21-3
RJ-45 console cable 21-4
Console port connection settings 21-4
Default login 21-4

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
1-1

New in this release 1-

The following sections summarize documentation changes in Product


Fundamentals (009-3240-006) for new software features introduced with
SAOS 6.12.

In-service upgrade
The following section was updated:
Software management on page 4-1
RADIUS Accounting and Load Balancing
The following section was updated:
User and user access security on page 4-3
1588v2 Boundary Clock
The following section was updated:
System timing configuration on page 4-6
ENNI Hairpin Switching
The following section was updated:
MEF Layer 2 Virtual Private Networks configuration on page 4-7
Port-based Private Forwarding Group
The following section was updated:
MEF Layer 2 Virtual Private Networks configuration on page 4-7
EVC Ping/IP interface IPv6
The following section was updated:
IP management on page 4-7
Static MC-LAG
The following section was updated:
Link and port configuration for fault management on page 4-11

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
1-2 New in this release

Multi-UNI/NNI NTE and TWAMP


The following section was updated:
TWAMP on page 4-19

Link Aggregation
The following section was updated:
Link aggregation on page 4-12
RFC 2544 UNI Generator and UNI Reflector
The following section was updated:
Operational roles on page 4-20

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
2-1

Documentation roadmap 2-

This chapter outlines the information contained in 39XX/51XX Service


Delivery and Aggregation Switches documentation suite.
It includes the following sections:
Intended audience
Roadmap
Ciena Customer Service
Intended audience
This document is intended for certified system installation technicians and
system administrators responsible for the installation and configuration of
Packet Networking products in the 39XX/51XX portfolio using SAOS Release
6.12.

All installation personnel are required to read, understand, and observe the
safety precautions described in the product manual.

The documents in this portfolio assume that the intended users possess basic
knowledge of, but not limited to:
Hardware installation and diagnostics
Ethernet concepts
IEEE standards
Local Area Networks (LAN)
Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN)
Roadmap
This section provides detailed summaries of the contents of the publications
in the Packet Networking portfolio. Documents are listed alphabetically.

This section includes the following documents:


39XX/51XX Administration and Security (009-3220-007)
39XX/51XX Command Reference (009-3220-010)
39XX/51XX Configuration (009-3220-008)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
2-2 Documentation roadmap

39XX/51XX Fault and Performance (009-3220-009)


39XX/51XX MIB Reference (009-3220-011)
39XX/51XX Product Fundamentals (009-3220-006)
39XX/51XX Release Notes (009-3240-013)
39XX/51XX Software Management and Licensing (009-3220-018)
39XX/51XX System Event Reference (009-3220-024)
3902 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3205-001)
3911 and UAM Hardware Installation Manual (009-3228-001)
3911 UNI Access Module Installation Manual (009-3228-019)
3916 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3226-001)
3920 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3229-001)
3930 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3223-001)
3931 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3225-001)
3931 Enclosure Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3225-019)
3932 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3227-001)
3940 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3230-001))
3960 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3231-001)
5140 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3232-001)
5142 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-001)
5150 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3222-001)
5160 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3207-001)
MPLS Deployment (009-3220-027)
Packet Networking Glossary (009-3299-026)
Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
Documentation roadmap 2-3

39XX/51XX Administration and Security (009-3220-007)


This document explains tasks performed by operations personnel that are
related to the administration of the network and security, including the
configuration and management of systems data and users. It also explains
how to manage and protect resources from unauthorized or detrimental
access and use.

Topics discussed in this document are:


administration fundamentals
accessing the system
initial configuration
system configuration and management
data collection configuration and management
security fundamentals
user configuration and management
user and user access security
secure communications and infrastructure
performing security containment and recovery

39XX/51XX Command Reference (009-3220-010)


This document describes the operating system commands and syntax. It
includes the Command Line Interface (CLI) fundamentals of navigating the
CLI, lists of hidden and deprecated commands, along with full syntax, access,
and descriptions for each CLI command.

39XX/51XX Configuration (009-3220-008)


This document describes how to configure system software on 39XX/51XX
Service Delivery and Aggregation switches.

Topics discussed in this document are:


configuration fundamentals
configuration management
port management
hardware resource management
synchronization configuration
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration
VLAN management
IP management (IPv4 and IPv6)
MEF L2 VPN configuration

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
2-4 Documentation roadmap

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation


Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Layer 2 VPN configuration
L2 Control Frame Tunneling configuration
Quality of Service configuration
Multicast services configuration

39XX/51XX Fault and Performance (009-3220-009)


This document contains information that supports the tasks performed by
operations personnel related to managing or preventing faults,
troubleshooting, and monitoring and improving the performance of SAOS.

Topics discussed in this document are:


fault management fundamentals
fault management by means of SNMP and RMON
link and port configuration for fault management
fault monitoring and analysis
Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) configuration
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) configuration
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) configuration
Ethernet Ring Protection Switching configuration
event logging configuration
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) configuration
Virtual Link Loss Indicator (VLLI) configuration
fault management troubleshooting
performance management tools and utilities
system performance testing with RFC 2544 benchmarking

39XX/51XX MIB Reference (009-3220-011)


This document provides an overview of the available Management
Information Base (MIB) files provided with SAOS software, including a
summary of files provided, and details descriptions of objects, notification, and
statistics for Ciena proprietary MIBs.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
Documentation roadmap 2-5

39XX/51XX Product Fundamentals (009-3220-006)


This document provides a high level overview of the products available in the
portfolio. Products discussed in this document include:

3902 Service Delivery Switch


3911 Service Delivery Switch
3916 Service Delivery Switch
3920 Service Delivery Switch
3930 Service Delivery Switch
3931 Service Delivery Switch
3932 Service Delivery Switch
3940 Service Delivery Switch
3960 Service Delivery Switch
5140 Service Aggregation Switch
5142 Service Aggregation Switch
5150 Service Aggregation Switch
5160 Service Aggregation Switch
Note: The 3902, 3911 and 3920 are not supported by this release. These
products use SAOS Release 6.10. They are included in this document in
order to provide a complete summary of the portfolio.

39XX/51XX Release Notes (009-3240-013)


This document contains a summary of new features introduced in this release,
issues fixed in this release, and issues found in this release (but not yet fixed),
as well as, issues fixed and found in prior releases.

39XX/51XX Software Management and Licensing (009-3220-018)


This document describes software management and licensing on 39XX/51XX
Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches.

Topics discussed in this document are:


software management fundamentals
managing system software
software license fundamentals
managing software license keys

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
2-6 Documentation roadmap

39XX/51XX System Event Reference (009-3220-024)


This document provides a list of all the possible events available in the
software. Please note that not all events listed will be available on each
platform.

3902 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3205-001)


This document explains how to install a 3902 Service Delivery Switch.

Note: The 3902 is not supported by this release. The 3902 uses SAOS
Release 6.10. This product is included in this document in order to provide
a complete summary of the portfolio.

3911 and UAM Hardware Installation Manual (009-3228-001)


This document explains how to install a 3911 Service Delivery Switch. The
document explains the end-to-end installation procedure for the UAM, 3911
and all internal components.

Note: The 3911 is not supported by this release. The 3911 uses SAOS
Release 6.10. This product is included in this document in order to provide
a complete summary of the portfolio.

3911 UNI Access Module Installation Manual (009-3228-019)


This document is focused on installing the UAM enclosure and the incoming
conduit. The document does not explain how to install the internal
components in the UAM. It is assumed that these will be installed later when
the 3911 is installed.

Installation instructions related to inside the enclosure are covered in 3911


and UAM Hardware Installation Manual (009-3228-001).

Note: The 3911 is not supported by this release. The 3911 uses SAOS
Release 6.10. This product is included in this document in order to provide
a complete summary of the portfolio.

3916 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3226-001)


This document explains how to install a 3916 Service Delivery Switch. Both
AC and DC systems are covered. This document describes both the standard
and mini chassis systems.

3920 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3229-001)


This document explains how to install a 3920 Service Delivery Switch. Both
AC and DC systems are covered.

Note: The 3920 is not supported by this release. The 3920 uses SAOS
Release 6.10. This product is included in this document so that it provides
a complete summary of the portfolio.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
Documentation roadmap 2-7

3930 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3223-001)


This document explains how to install a 3930 Service Delivery Switch. Both
AC and DC systems are covered. The installation instructions also describe
how to install the optional pluggable modules.

3931 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3225-001)


This document explains how to install a 3931 Service Delivery Switch at an
outdoor installation site. Both AC and DC systems are covered.

3931 Enclosure Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3225-019)


This document explains how to install a 3931 enclosure only. Installation
instructions related to inside the enclosure are covered in 3931 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3225-001).

3932 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3227-001)


This document explains how to install a 3932 Service Delivery Switch. Both
AC and DC systems are covered.

3940 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3230-001))


This document explains how to install a 3940 Service Delivery Switch. Both
AC and DC systems are covered.

3960 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3231-001)


This document explains how to install a 3960 Service Delivery Switch. Both
AC and DC systems are covered.

5140 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3232-001)


This document explains how to install a 5140 Service Aggregation Switch.
This system uses DC power only.

5142 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-001)


This document explains how to install a 5142 Service Aggregation Switch.
Both AC and DC systems are covered.

5150 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3222-001)


This document explains how to install a 5150 Service Aggregation Switch.
Both AC and DC systems are covered. The installation instructions also
describe how to install the optional pluggable modules.

5160 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3207-001)


This document explains how to install a 5160 Service Aggregation Switch.
Both AC and DC systems are covered.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
2-8 Documentation roadmap

MPLS Deployment (009-3220-027)


This standalone Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) deployment guide
provides an explanation of MPLS fundamentals and provides example service
configurations.

Packet Networking Glossary (009-3299-026)


This document provides definitions of commonly-used terms and acronyms
for the Packet Networking portfolio.

Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602)


This document provides a summary of the pluggable transceivers supported
by the products in the Packet Networking portfolio.

Ciena Customer Service


This section explains how to contact Ciena Customer Service.

Ciena Specialist Services


Ciena Specialist Services is a comprehensive services practice designed to
help the network operator maximize network infrastructure investment. Ciena
Specialist Services offer an extensive team of specialists who collaborate with
the network operator to build a system of resources to achieve critical
objectives with best-of-breed solutions that optimize network efficiency and
performance.

To contact Ciena Specialist Services, go to http://www.ciena.com/products/


category/services.

Getting documentation
Product documentation is available from the Ciena portal. Contact your Ciena
account representative to set up a Ciena portal account.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3-1

39XX/51XX overview 3-

Cienas Packet Networking portfolio combines Service Delivery and


Aggregation Switches and Service Aware Operating System (SAOS) software
to create the infrastructure necessary for low-touch, high velocity Carrier
Ethernet access and metro networks, and provide a common, consistent way
to deliver the full range of Ethernet services from the access edge to the core.

Cienas Packet Networking products enable service providers to realize new


levels of speed, differentiation, operational scalability, and reliability in
delivering revenue-generating Ethernet business services, mobile backhaul
services, and residential broadband aggregation.

The switches deliver Ethernet services across multiple networks, applying


bandwidth management and virtual switching capabilities to deliver varying
amounts of data to different ports.

A switch accepts traffic, encapsulates the traffic in a secure envelope, and


then forwards the traffic to specified networks and network locations. Switches
receive data from an external source and forward that data to one or many
ports, as follows:
Network frames are received on physical ports.
Frames are associated with logical services.
Outgoing traffic is queued to physical ports based on logical services.
Data frames are forwarded based on allocated bandwidth.
Data enters a switch on a physical port. Physical ports on a switch are mapped
to logical ports. These logical ports (also referenced as logical interfaces) are
attached to virtual switches or VLANs within a switch. A switch forwards the
data to connections that are linked to the virtual switches or VLANs. A switch
maintains queues on the egress ports as part of the CoS policy. CoS allows a
switch to allocate bandwidth to certain ports and schedule the transit of data
through the ports specified.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3-2 39XX/51XX overview

Figure 3-1 shows a network comprised of devices from the Packet Networking
portfolio.

Figure 3-1
End-to-End Packet Networking

The 39XX/51XX portfolio comprises:


Edge devices on page 3-3
Aggregation devices on page 3-5

Additionally, this chapter discusses:


Network interfaces on page 3-6
Sample configurations on page 3-9

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
39XX/51XX overview 3-3

Edge devices
Edge devices are Cienas Service Delivery Switches (SDS), which are
available with a range of 10/100M Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) and
10GbE physical port counts. Edge devices provide Ethernet connectivity to
deliver high-speed voice, video, and data connectivity. Edge devices are
designed to lower the overall cost of building out a fiber network. Edge devices
can be installed in customer premises, on the sides of buildings, or on utility
poles.

Table 3-1 summarizes edge devices.

Table 3-1
Edge device summary (3000 Family)

Model Form Factor Ports Power Temp Range

3902 Desktop 1 x 1000M SFP NNI Indoor external AC 0C to +40C


clamshell 1 x 10/100/1000M RJ-45 UNI adapter

3911 Outdoor 2 x 100/1000M SFP NNI/UNI Indoor AC Brick, -40C to +65C


8 x 100/1000M RJ-45 UNI Outdoor DC UAM or
AC UAM

3916 AC 1 RU, ETSI 2 x 100/1000M SFP NNI/UNI Single front fixed 0C to +50C
Standard and 2 x Gigabit SFP NNI AC
Mini chassis 2 x 10/100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI
sizes

3916 Dual 1 RU, ETSI 2 x 100/1000M SFP NNI/UNI Dual front fixed AC 0C to +50C
AC Standard and 2 x Gigabit SFP NNI
Mini chassis 2 x 10/100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI
sizes

3916 DC 1 RU, ETSI 2 x 100/1000M SFP NNI/UNI Single front fixed 0C to +50C
Standard 2 x Gigabit SFP NNI DC
chassis size 2 x 10/100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI
only

3920 AC 1 RU, ETSI 4 x 100/1000M SFP NNI Single front fixed 0C to +50C
8 x 100/1000M RJ-45 UNI AC

3920 DC 1 RU, ETSI 4 x 100/1000M SFP NNI Single front fixed 0C to +50C
8 x 100/1000M RJ-45 UNI DC

3930 1 RU 2 x Gigabit/10Gigabit SFP+ NNI/UNI Dual front pluggable -40C to +65C


Standard 4 x 100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI AC or DC

4 x 100/1000M SFP UNI

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3-4 39XX/51XX overview

Table 3-1
Edge device summary (3000 Family) (continued)

Model Form Factor Ports Power Temp Range

3930 1 RU 2 x Gigabit/10Gigabit SFP+ NNI/UNI Dual front pluggable -40C to +65C


Sync 4 x 100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI AC or DC

4 x 100/1000M SFP UNI

3930 1 RU 2 x Gigabit/10Gigabit SFP+ NNI/UNI Dual front pluggable -40C to +65C


Sync + 4 x 100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI AC or DC
External
Timing 4 x 100/1000M SFP UNI
External Timing: BITS, 1 PPS, and
10 MHz

3931 Outdoor 2 x Gigabit/10Gigabit SFP+ NNI/UNI Dual pluggable AC -40C to +70C


Standard 4 x 10/100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI or DC within
enclosure
4 x 100/1000M SFP UNI

3931 Outdoor 2 x Gigabit/10Gigabit SFP+ NNI/UNI Dual pluggable AC -40C to +70C


Sync 4 x 10/100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI or DC within
enclosure
4 x 100/1000M SFP UNI
Supports Sync-E, 1588 and Stratum
3E holdover clock.

3932 1 RU 2 x Gigabit/10Gigabit SFP+ NNI/UNI Dual front pluggable -40C to +65C


4 x 100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI AC or DC

4 x 100/1000M SFP UNI


16 x DS1/E1 ports
External Timing: BITS, 1 PPS, and
10 MHz.

3940 1 RU 4 x 100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 NNI/UNI Dual rear pluggable 0C to +50C


20 x 100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI AC or DC

3960 1 RU 4 x 10 Gigabit XFP NNI/UNI Dual rear pluggable 0C to +50C


8 x 10/100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI AC or DC

Note: The 3902, 3911 and 3920 are not supported by this release. These products use SAOS Release
6.10. They are included in this document in order to provide a complete summary of the portfolio.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
39XX/51XX overview 3-5

Aggregation devices
Aggregation devices are Cienas Service Aggregation Switches (SAS), which
are available with a range of 10/100M Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) and
10 GbE physical port counts. This enables them to better fill the transport
facilities within both the metro access and aggregation tiers and ultimately
minimize the number of IP/MPLS router ports with which they interwork.
Aggregation devices can be deployed in a wide variety of locations, including
business parks, outside plant cabinets, and in central offices.

Table 3-2 summarizes aggregation devices.

Table 3-2
Aggregation device summary (5000 Family)

Model Form Factor Ports Power Temp Range

5140 2 RU, ETSI 4 x 100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 NNI/UNI Dual-feed, single -40C to +65C
20 x 100/1000M SFP/RJ-45 UNI front fixed DC

5142 1 RU 4 x Gigabit/10Gigabit SFP+ NNI/UNI Dual front pluggable -40C to +65C


20 x Gigabit SFP/SFP+ UNI AC or DC

External Timing: BITS, 1 PPS, and


10 MHz

5150 2 RU, ETSI 4 x 10 Gigabit (optional) XFP NNI/UNI Dual front pluggable -40C to +65C
48 x 100/1000M SFP UNI AC or DC

1 x (optional) BITS In or Out

5160 1 RU 4 x Gigabit/10Gigabit SFP+ NNI/UNI Dual front pluggable -40C to +65C


20 x Gigabit SFP/SFP+ UNI AC or DC

External Timing: BITS, 1 PPS, and


10 MHz

5305 6 RU 5 slots Dual front pluggable 0C to +40C


10 x 10 Gigabit NNI/UNI or AC or DC

120 x Gigabit NNI/UNI

5410 22 RU 10 slots Dual rear fixed DC 0C to +40C


4 x 10 Gigabit NNI/UNI or fused or breaker

480 x Gigabit NNI/UNI

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3-6 39XX/51XX overview

Network interfaces
Network interfaces comprise:
External switch interfaces on page 3-6
OneControl Unified Management System on page 3-9
Ethernet Services Manager on page 3-9

External switch interfaces


External switch interfaces comprise connections between a switch and
environmental components. Figure 3-2 illustrates the external interfaces of a
Packet Networking switch.

Figure 3-2
External interface of a Packet Networking switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
39XX/51XX overview 3-7

Table 3-3 describes external switch interfaces.

Table 3-3
External switch interfaces

Identifier Interface Description

E1 User (Console) to and from Connects a user to the CLI Agent by means of a console
CLI Agent cable.

E2 User (Management Allows users to operate a Packet Networking switch


Ethernet) to and from SSH through an SSH session after successful authentication.
server Authentication attempts and responses, whether for local
or remote server authentication, are sent over this
interface.

E3 User (In-band) to and from Allows users to operate a Packet Networking switch
Data Plane through an SSH session in the same manner as E2.
However, all user information is received in-band through
the fiber or copper ports.

E4 Data Plane (Fiber/Copper Comprises several physical copper and/or fiber ports which
Hardware Interface) to/from send and receive production network flow. The network
Network Device flow is in the form of Ethernet frames which can have
additional fields to comply with Carrier Ethernet formats
such as 802.1ah.

E5 Events and Alarms to Syslog Connects the Syslog Collector to the Events and Alarms
Collector subsystem. A Packet Networking switch can be configured
to send syslog messages to external syslog servers
through this interface.

E6 Security Manager to and Connects the Security Manager subsystem to an external


from RADIUS Server RADIUS server. The Security Manager sends
authentication data to the remote RADIUS server over this
interface. The RADIUS server then sends a positive or
negative response based on the credentials provided.

E7 Security Manager to and Connects the Security Manager subsystem to an external


from TACACS+ Server TACACS+ server. The Security Manager sends
authentication data to the remote TACACS+ server over
this interface. The TACACS+ server then sends a positive
or negative response based on the credentials provided.

E8 SNMP Agent to SNMP Connects the SNMP Agent subsystem to an external


Manager SNMP Manager. A Packet Networking switch can be
configured to detect certain events, including security
violations, which it can then report by means of SNMPv3
traps. The SNMPv3 traps are sent over this interface.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3-8 39XX/51XX overview

Table 3-3
External switch interfaces (continued)

Identifier Interface Description

E9 Sys Time to and from NTP Connects an NTP server to the Sys Time subsystem. The
Server Sys Time subsystem sends requests over this interface to
the NTP server and the NTP server responds with time
information over this interface.

E10 Events and Alarms to Alarm Connects the Events and Alarms subsystem to the Alarm
Console Console for reporting security violations.

E11 DHCP Agent to and from Connects the DHCP Agent subsystem to an external
DHCP Server DHCP server. DHCP is used primarily to acquire and
assign available IP addresses to network interfaces.

E12 ARP Agent to and from Connects the ARP Agent subsystem to other network
Network Devices devices. ARP is used to identify a remote devices MAC
address based on its IP by broadcasting ARP requests and
receiving ARP replies.

E13 DNS Agent to and from DNS Connects the DNS Agent subsystem to an external DNS
Server server. DNS is used to resolve name addresses into IP
addresses.

E14 FTP Agent to and from FTP/ Connects the FTP Agent subsystem to an external FTP,
TFTP/SFTP Server TFTP, or SFTP server. FTP, TFTP, and SFTP are used to
transfer files from one device to another over a network.

E15 Telnet User (In-band) to and Connects a user to the Data Plane by means of the Telnet
from Data Plane protocol. This interface is functionally identical to E3 in that
it grants the user a CLI session. However, the
communication protocol for this interface is Telnet instead
of SSH.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
39XX/51XX overview 3-9

OneControl Unified Management System


Cienas OneControl Unified Management System provides a single solution
for network and service management capabilities across the whole portfolio of
Cienas Packet Networking, Transport, and Switching services.

By providing a single, central platform that works in concert with several


otherwise separate Ciena Element Management Systems (EMSes),
OneControl provides a consistent look and feel for monitoring and managing
fault, performance management, service management, and provisioning
across the Layer 0, Layer 1, and Layer 2 network services. OneControl
operators can use a common interface to view and respond to alarms raised
by any managed NE in the network, any of the supported or integrated
EMSes, and OneControl itself.

In addition to its own native network management capabilities, OneControl


can be configured to interface with Ethernet Services Manager (ESM). ESM
shares all topology and alarm data with OneControl; so if a user adds or
deletes a network element from the network using ESM, that change is
reflected in OneControl as well. In the same way, acknowledging or clearing
an alarm using ESM is reflected in OneControl.

Ethernet Services Manager


Cienas Ethernet Services Manager (ESM) is a carrier-grade platform for
automated service activation, creation, and management for Ciena's Packet
Networking Service Delivery Switches and Service Aggregation Switches.
ESM enables subscriber-managed services and lets users efficiently build
and deploy large-scale Carrier Ethernet networks.

ESM is a comprehensive suite of integrated software tools built on a lowtouch,


service-oriented architecture that transparently handles the details of
deploying, delivering, and sustaining carrier Ethernet services.

Sample configurations
This section provides the following sample configurations:
Business services on page 3-10
Mobile backhaul on page 3-10
Purpose-built private networks on page 3-11
Cloud access on page 3-11

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3-10 39XX/51XX overview

Business services
39XX/51XX switches can be deployed by service providers to support mobile,
cloud, business, residential, and wholesale services for increased revenues.
Service providers can connect Private Branch Exchanges (PBX) and Multi-
Tenant Units (MTU) to SDSs that communicate with SASs over Carrier
Ethernet and MPLS networks.

Figure 3-3 shows a sample business services configuration.

Figure 3-3
Sample business services configuration

Mobile backhaul
Service providers can configure a mobile backhaul solution that use the single
Packet Switching Network (PSN) to carry residential, commercial, and cellular
traffic, and so reduce mobile data transport costs. 39XX/51XX switches can
be deployed to receive signals from cell towers and transmit them to a central
exchange site.

Figure 3-4 shows a sample wholesale mobile backhaul

Figure 3-4
Sample wholesale mobile backhaul configuration

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
39XX/51XX overview 3-11

Purpose-built private networks


39XX/51XX switches can be deployed as a purpose-built private network. For
example, a hospital can choose to build a network that connects the main
hospital facility to a back-up data center, an x-ray and MRI facility, offices of
assisting physicians, and tele-health high-definition (HD) video services by
means of optical Ethernet services provided by 39XX/51XX switches.

Figure 3-5 shows a sample purpose-built private network configuration for a


medical application.

Figure 3-5
Sample configuration for purpose-built private networks

Cloud access
39XX/51XX switches can be configured to provide cloud access. For
example, a company can configure a connection between a branch office and
regional headquarters using SDSs. The branch office can then access the
public cloud and private cloud maintained by the regional headquarters.

Figure 3-6 shows a sample configuration for cloud access.

Figure 3-6
Sample configuration for cloud access

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3-12 39XX/51XX overview

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-1

SAOS software 4-

SAOS software provides a common set of advanced Ethernet features that


improve operational efficiency from edge to core with consistent system and
service attributes.

SAOS software topics are:


Software management and licensing on page 4-1
Administration on page 4-2
Security on page 4-3
Configuration on page 4-5
Fault management on page 4-11
Performance management on page 4-19

Software management and licensing


This section provides an overview of software management and licensing.

Software management
Software upgrades and downgrades can be performed from the CLI, SNMP,
or by running command files. The upgrade process takes about 10 minutes to
complete. Upgrades for multiple switches in a network should take place in an
organized manner, for example, starting from the edge of the network and
working toward the core, or starting from the core and working toward to the
edge.

The in-service software upgrade keeps the data plane up and running while a
system is performing a software upgrade. Layer 2 traffic continues to flow
while the system upgrades its software and reboots. A management plane
outage still occurs. The in-service software upgrade is supported on the 3916,
3930-910, 3930-930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150 and 5160.

Software licensing
A license is a permit to use a premium feature. A license is considered
installed or uninstalled based on the presence of one or more license keys.
The system software comes with the Base-Features license and supports

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-2 SAOS software

premium features that require an additional installed license key. A premium


feature may consist of a portion of an existing feature, or it may consist of
multiple features.

A license key is a data object generated by the Ciena license administrator


and installed by an operator. License keys are encrypted and contain no
human readable information.

Administration
This section describes the protocols and techniques used in 39XX/51XX
Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches to configure and manage system
data and users.

System setup
System setup is performed by means of the following protocols:
IPv4 and IPv6: Switches communicate by means of IPv4 or IPv6.
Telnet client: Switches support a Telnet client for establishing Telnet
connections to other Telnet servers specified by a host name or IPv4 or
IPv6 address.
Telnet server: Telnet server enables support for users to connect to the
switch using the Telnet protocol.
DHCP client: Switches support DHCPv4 or DHCPv6. IETF RFC 2131
DHCP client interface is supported for IPv4 address assignment and other
IPv4 configurations through DHCP options. IETF RFC 3315 DHCPv6 is a
network protocol that is used for configuring IPv6 hosts with IP addresses
and other configuration information required to operate on an IPv6
network.
DHCP Relay Agent: In the residential, metropolitan Ethernet-access
environment, DHCP centrally manages the IP address assignment for a
large number of subscribers. The DHCP relay agent adds information to
the DHCP request that can be used by the DHCP server to assign
addresses. There are two types of DHCP relay agents which can be used
independently or together:
Layer 2 (L2) DHCP relay agent
Lightweight DHCPv6 relay agent (LDRA)
DNS: DNS resolves domain names for IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
Network Time Protocol (NTP): An NTP client is used by switches to
automatically synchronize time and date to a remote NTP server running
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP): NDP uses a Neighbor Discovery
cache database as new neighbor addresses are advertised to the node.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
SAOS software 4-3

System access
System access to switches is by means of a CLI through Telnet or SSH, or
through a serial console port.

System shell operations


System shell operations allow the service provider to customize the switch
after installation.

Data collection and management


Data is collected and managed by means of:
RMON history groups
RMON automatic history entries
user history
RMON file settings
RMON information
system processes
system state dump files

Security
This section describes the protocols and techniques used in 39XX/51XX
Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches to manage and protect resources
from unauthorized or detrimental access and use.

User configuration and management


A user at the super access level can create user accounts with the following
access levels:
limited (read-only)
admin (read/write)
superuser (read/write)
diag (read/write/diagnostic)

User names and passwords are case-sensitive and are limited to a length of
16 characters. When creating a user account, the password can be specified
as encrypted, so it cannot be easily viewed, or as clear text.

User and user access security


User and user access security is achieved through:
RADIUS
TACACS+
authentication

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-4 SAOS software

RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a client/server
system used to secure networks against unauthorized remote access such as
with Telnet. When authenticating a Telnet user, the device sends
authentication requests to one or more RADIUS servers. The RADIUS server
keeps track of all user authentication and service access information. The
RADIUS server returns authentication results to the device and the user is
either allowed or denied access based on this information.

RADIUS configuration includes three lists of servers: one for user login, one
for 802.1x authentication and one for 802.1x accounting. RADIUS supports
load balancing for dot1x authentication and dot1x accounting to determine
what server will be selected for the first attempt to do authentication.

TACACS+
TACACS+ provides an industry-standard security protocol for controlling AAA
functions. It also provides security by using a shared key to encrypt
information between the NAS and the authentication server. 39XX/51XX
switches support both IPv4 and IPv6 TACACS+ servers.

Authentication
Three methods of user authentication are supported: local, RADIUS, and
TACACS+, and separate authentication methods can be set for the serial port
and remote access.

Secure communications and infrastructure


Secure communications and infrastructure is provided by means of:
SSH, which provides remote login and SFTP file transfers. Intended as a
more secure replacement of Telnet, SSH verifies and grants access to log
in requests by encrypting user ID and passwords. SSH/SFTP is supported
over IPv6.
SFTP/TFTP/FTP clients, which are used to download files from an SFTP/
TFTP/FTP server, for example, software images.
broadcast containment, which prevents services from being disrupted by
broadcast storms on specified ports as well as Denial of Service (DoS)
attack.
MAC tables: When a device receives a packet destined for an unknown
destination MAC address, it floods the packet to every connected link. As
it receives responses back, devices dynamically learn the association
between the source MAC address, port, VLAN, and virtual switch, and
then enter the information in the MAC table.
IP Access Control Lists (IP-ACL), which provide basic security for IP
Protocols that terminate within the device.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
SAOS software 4-5

802.1x: The IEEE 802.1x-2001 standard defines an authentication


protocol that uses a centralized authentication server (typically a RADIUS
server) to provide port-based and user-based network access control.
Security Access Control (SAC), which allows static MAC addresses and
controls the number of dynamically-learned MAC addresses on a per-port
basis.
SNMP, which supports secure communications and infrastructure by
means of community mapping and the view-based access control model.
NTP Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication support, which allows the
NTP client to verify that the server is known and trusted.

Configuration
This section describes the protocols and techniques used in 39XX/51XX
Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches to create and support Ethernet
delivery, aggregation, and distribution configurations.

Configuration management
A device can store multiple device configuration files. However, only one
configuration file can be active at a time. By default, configuration information
is saved to a file called startup-config.

The startup-config file is also the default load file. The parameters defined in
the startup-config file are applied when the device reboots (unless an
alternate file is specified). The current running configurations on a device are
not saved to a configuration file unless specifically saved. This includes
configuration changes made using the CLI or SNMP.

If a device is rebooted without saving the configuration, all changes are lost.

Port management
Physical ports provide connectivity to other devices, which is essential for any
switching device. To aggregate bandwidth and provide link redundancy
between two devices, physical ports are added to a Link Aggregation Group
(LAG). The port management commands provide the ability to configure ports
and troubleshoot connectivity.

Hardware resource management


The system assigns hardware resources (classifier, meter, and counter
resource types) for various software features. Depending upon the feature,
resources can be reassigned to provide additional resources for other
features.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-6 SAOS software

This customized resource management is supported for the following


features:
Accelerated CFM over PBB-TE (5150)
Broadcast containment
CFM
DHCP relay
Traffic profiling
Virtual circuit statistics
Virtual switch Layer 2 enhanced transforms
Transport OAM

System timing configuration


System timing is the recovery and distribution of frequency, phase and time-
of-day information, in order to maintain synchronization between network
elements.

System timing is performed by means of:


Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE)
IEEE 1588 version 2 Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
external interfaces, which comprise:
Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS)
GPS frequency (10 MHz/ 2.048 MHz/1.544 MHz) and phase (1PPS)
Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) line timing
Note 1: See External timing on page 20-1 for more information.
Note 2: For Release 6.12, time-of-day extracted from PTP is only
displayed. Full time-of-day functionality will be supported in a future
release.
Note 3: The 5150 Packet Timing is a 5150 with an upgraded Stratum 3E
OCXO. This device supports PTP timing.

Link Layer Discovery Protocol configuration


The system software supports Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) as
specified in the IEEE 802.1AB-2005 standard. Like Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP), LLDP is a link-constrained, layer 2 protocol. This means that
the exchange of LLDP messages only takes place between adjacent LLDP
agents (devices) on the network, unless control frame tunneling is used to
tunnel the LLDP PDUs through another device.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
SAOS software 4-7

LLDP agents communicate basic management information with each other by


exchanging Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Units (LLDPDUs). The
information about a device, and its immediate neighbors is then retrievable
through the standard LLDP MIBs using SNMP. It is important to note that
LLDP operates only on physical ports.

Virtual Local Area Network management


VLANs determine how traffic is forwarded within a device. The ingress and
egress behavior of each port must be taken into account.

The VLAN can be thought of as an imaginary wire that connects the ingress
port to the egress port or ports. VLANs must be created using the CLI, MIB,
or the Device Manager, prior to configuring other features on the device. A
VLAN is identified by two basic parameters:
VLAN ID, which is the value used to identify the VLAN
VLAN Name, which is defined by the network operator. VLAN names may
not begin with a number.

IP management
IP management comprises the following components:
IP Interfaces, which enables IP packet sending and receiving.
IP Loopback, which enables IP packets to ingress and egress over the
same interface.
Static IP routes, which defines static IP routes.
Forward Information Base (FIB), which stores static route and forwarding
information.
Static Address Resolution Protocol routes, which defines ARP static
routes.
Adjacency Information Base (AIB), which stores ARP static route and
adjacency information.

39XX/51XX switches support IPv6 and IPv4 addresses. You can configure an
IP interface with one IPv4 address and up to two IPv6 global or link local
addresses. IPv6 may have up to 16 extra Stateless Auto configured
addresses (SLAAC) when connected to Routers.

MEF Layer 2 Virtual Private Networks configuration


Layer 2 Virtual Private Networks comprise:
virtual switches, which are Layer 2 forwarding domains between a
customer bundle (multiple per-port per-VLAN entries) or per-port entries
and the network transport interfaces.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-8 SAOS software

virtual circuits, which define a secure logical connection between one or


more customer endpoints.
provider VLAN, which is defined by the VLAN assigned to the virtual circuit
when it is created.
reserved VLAN, which is used internally to link a virtual switch with an
internal switching domain, and acts to connect both subscriber and
provider facing interfaces.
Q-in-Q encapsulation: Encapsulating an 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame
within another 802.1Q tag enables the service provider to encapsulate the
customer VLAN tagging information while using VLANs within the provider
network.
EVPL CoS, which comprises virtual switch CoS policies and virtual switch
member CoS policy override.
EVPL bundling, which allows multiple customer VLAN IDs (C-VIDs) to be
mapped to one or more virtual switches. EVPL bundling only functions
where traffic is being encapsulated.
VLAN translation for virtual switches, which is configurable VLAN
translation to classify Q-in-Q traffic from one L2 switching domain and
remap it to another.
private forwarding groups (PFG), which restrict forwarding of L2 traffic
between groups of ports within a shared VLAN or virtual switch. Port-
based PFGs alter the forwarding behavior of ports such that their
forwarding domain is restricted to a subset of ports on the switch.
External Network-to-Network (ENNI) hairpin, which transforms and
switches frames out of the same physical port they came in on. Hairpin
switching occurs when a message from an origin endpoint is returned in
the direction it came from in order to get to its destination endpoint. Sub-
port interfaces are required for ENNI hairpin switching.
Ethernet service types support Layer 2 (L2) Virtual Private Networks
(VPNs) defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF) as
E-Line: point-to-point service among the same service provider
E-LAN: multiple point service
E-Tree: point-to-multipoint service
E-Access: point-to-point service among different service providers

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering implementation


The implementation of Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-
TE), formerly referred to as Provider Backbone Transport (PBT), in the core
of a Ciena network comprises VLAN tagging and Connectivity Fault
Management.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
SAOS software 4-9

VLAN tagging
The IEEE 802.1Q standard specifies a mechanism for adding tags to Ethernet
frames. This tagging allows an Ethernet network to be divided into virtual
networks or VLANs. Generally, individual customers in a providers network
are identified by unique VLAN IDs. Additionally, each customer typically uses
VLAN IDs in their own network to differentiate between service types (for
example, data or VoIP) and possibly to distinguish between departments. This
three-tier hierarchy allows separate domains for the service provider,
customer and individual enterprise departments.

Connectivity Fault Management


PBB-TE virtual switches and tunnels are monitored through the use of IEEE
802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) Continuity Check Messages
(CCM). When CFM services are configured for PBB-TE virtual switches, CCM
control frames are sent and received within the PBB-TE tunnels and monitor
faults based on the associated PBB-TE virtual circuit events. For CFM
services that monitor PBB-TE tunnels, CCM control frames are sent and
received regularly along the PBB-TE tunnels. If the primary tunnel should
experience a fault, the tunnel endpoints automatically begin using the backup
tunnel. The forwarding database entries are pre-configured along the backup
path to minimize the failover and restoration times. Only one backup tunnel
can be created.

Multiprotocol Label Switching configuration


Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) supports circuit (voice), cell-switched
(business) and packet switching in a single packet switched network to save
capital and operational expenditures. MPLS speeds up traditional IP
forwarding with a simplified header and lookup process. MPLS can be used
to build seamless and consistent Layer 2 (L2) Virtual Private Networks (VPNs)
between two or more remote sites traversing many different physical networks
with enhanced performance and topology discovery to ensure the most
efficient routes.

L2 Control Frame Tunneling configuration


With L2 control frame tunneling, the network operator can change the
handling of untagged L2 control frames to be processed and forwarded as if
they were data frames instead of being discarded or locally processed. Also,
the network provider can change the handling of transparent L2 control
frames to be transformed to L2PT frame format.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-10 SAOS software

Quality of service configuration


Quality of service comprises:
Class of Services (CoS) policies and mapping. The system software
associates an internal resolved CoS (R-CoS) value and resolved Color (R-
COLOR) with every ingress frame that classifies to a port. The R-CoS and
R-COLOR values provide the baseline for CoS treatment of a frame as it
switches through the device.
Traffic profiling, which classifies traffic based on different classification
rules and meters the traffic flow to configured EIR/PIR and CIR values
defined in kbps.
Traffic profiling with hierarchical ingress metering: with hierarchical
ingress metering, frames classify to a parent traffic profile for metering,
and are fed to a child traffic profile for additional metering.
Congestion management processing, which determines whether a frame
should be enqueued or dropped. Congestion management is configured
per queue based on a congestion avoidance profile associated with each
CoS queue.
Egress scheduling, which determines the order in which the physical
queues are processed.
Egress shaping: A shaper-rate and burst size can be configured on the
egress port queue group that limits the amount of egress bandwidth (in
Kbps) a port uses(0 to 40 Gbps) and controls the amount of traffic (in
Kbytes) that can burst (0 to 256 Mbytes). The configured shaper-rate
normalizes to a rate in varying increments depending upon the sum of the
configured burst size.
Multicast services configuration
Multicast services deliver data frames to multiple destinations by means of
frame replications. Frame replications take place in a switch that is directly
connected to a multicast server or indirectly-connected to a multicast server
through a router or switch. In multicast services, frame replication can be to
selected members of the flood domain, decided either statically through
channel stream or dynamically using Internet Group Multicast Protocol
(IGMP) snooping. This allows network devices to discern multicast traffic and
act on it according to the local content rules and processes for the platform.

Multicast services in the network comprise the following components:


one or more multicast servers
one or more hosts
routers that replicate the multicast packets at L3 and send to multiple
interfaces

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
SAOS software 4-11

switches at L2 that forward multicast frames to multiple interfaces towards


the hosts, that is, the multicast termination points

Pseudowire emulation services configuration


Pseudowire Emulation (PWE) services convert standard Time Division
Multiplexing (TDM) streams into Ethernet packets using pseudowire
technology. PWE services are provided by the 3932 platform for transport of
legacy T1 and E1 and DS0/E0 services over the packet network.

PWE services work with SAOS software to provide the following TDM
services:
Structure-Agnostic TDM over Packet (SAToP)
Circuit Emulation Services over Packet Switched Networks (CESoP)

Fault management
This section describes the protocols and techniques used in 39XX/51XX
Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches to create a fault-tolerant system.

Fault management by means of SNMP and RMON


SNMP governs the functions and management of network devices and
components called managed objects. SNMP provides the ability to administer
managed objects using a Network Management System (NMS) interface,
instead of the CLI. Examples of NMS interfaces are a Management
Information Base (MIB) browser or Ethernet Services Manager (ESM). The
NMS interface acts as an SNMP manager and sends messages to the device
in the form of an SNMP Protocol Description Unit (PDU). These messages are
processed by the SNMP agent on the device.

Remote monitoring (RMON) allows the network operator to enable devices to


gather information related to groups defined in RFC 1757 and RFC 2021. The
network operator uses a network monitoring device to probe the network to
retrieve this information by sampling SNMP MIB objects.

Link and port configuration for fault management


Link and port configuration for fault management comprises
port mirroring
port state mirroring
link flap detection
link aggregation

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-12 SAOS software

Port mirroring
Port mirroring is where another port is configured to mirror the traffic of a
specified port to monitor ingress and egress traffic. By attaching a protocol
analyzer to the port, you can monitor and analyze traffic. Port mirroring actions
can only be configured on physical ports.

Port state mirroring


Port state mirroring (sometimes referred to as link loss forwarding or link state
tracking) provides link redundancy by associating the link state of one or more
source (uplink) ports with one or more downstream (destination) ports on the
switch. If the link is lost on a source port, all of the other destination ports
associated with it are automatically placed in a disabled state as well. When
used in conjunction with RSTP, port state mirroring can be leveraged to force
the use of a secondary link.

Link flap detection


Link flap detection is available on physical ports. Detection consists of
monitoring the link state of the port for Up to Down transitions. If a number of
up or down transitions occur within a specified time frame, a link flap event is
generated. The port is marked as operationally down for either a period of time
or until manual intervention takes place.

Link aggregation
Link aggregation is defined in IEEE 802.3ad. This standard defines how two
or more full-duplex Ethernet ports of the same speed can be combined into a
single logical port to carry traffic between two devices connected in parallel.
This logical grouping of ports enables load sharing and load balancing among
these ports and thus an aggregation of bandwidth as well. Traffic destined to
egress on an aggregated port is distributed among all the links in the group.

Link aggregation also provides inherent, automatic redundancy for high-traffic


network connections. This is achieved by dynamically redirecting traffic from
a failed port to the remaining good ports in the aggregation group. Link
aggregation can be used to expand bandwidth and add link redundancy.

Link aggregation supports the following hashing mechanisms:


Known Unicast: layer 2, layer 3 and enhanced (3916, 3930, 3931, 3932,
3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms)
Unicast, multicast, broadcast (BUM): simplified and enhanced (3916,
3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms) flood hash
modes

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
SAOS software 4-13

Table 4-1 shows the number of LAGs supported for each platform, and
whether enhanced hashing is supported.

Table 4-1
Supported LAGs per platform

Platform Number of LAGs Number of Enhanced


physical ports per Hashing
LAG Support

3902 0 0 No

3911 5 8 No

3916 3 6 Yes

3920 6 8 No

3930 5 8 Yes

3931 5 8 Yes

3932 5 8 Yes

3940 12 8 No

3960 6 8 Yes

5140 12 8 No

5142 12 8 Yes

5150 26 8 Yes

5160 12 8 Yes

A multi-chassis (MC) LAG is a LAG with ports that terminate on separate


chassis to provide node-level redundancy, along with the link-level
redundancy provided on the LAG.

Fault monitoring and analysis


Monitoring of chassis components can provide early warning indications of
possible failure to ensure safe and reliable system operation and avoid
network interruptions.

System resources are also monitored and available for display. System
resource items include CPU and memory usage, as well as aggregations,
meter profiles, PBB-TE entries, virtual switches, and MAC tables.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-14 SAOS software

Connectivity Fault Management configuration


Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) provides a method to continuously
monitor the end-to-end network connectivity of a network service, such as a
Virtual Switch (VS) or a VLAN. Services can be monitored over a single hop,
a point-to-point link, or over multiple hops, using equipment managed by one
or more service providers and operations entities. Services are identified by a
collection of Service Access Points (SAPs) called a Service Instance. There
are two types of SAPs:
Maintenance End Points: Maintenance End Points (MEPs) are created at
the edge (entry/exit) points of the service being monitored.
Maintenance Intermediate Points: Maintenance Intermediate Points
(MIPs) are created between MEPs to track faults at intermediate points.

MEPs send periodic multicast messages called Continuity Check Messages


(CCMs) to each other through the VS or VLAN service to determine the status
of the service connection. These can be thought of as heartbeat messages.
Devices not configured for CFM forward CCMs as they would any other
multicast message. If an expected CCM is not received by a MEP on a
participating network device within the specified period, a fault alarm
regarding the service is issued in the form of an SNMP trap and system log
message.

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol configuration


Network operators can implement the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) in a Ciena network.

Ethernet can support many different topologies, such as star, ring, or ladder
configurations. While this flexibility makes it ideal for a dynamic network, it can
create issues when more than one active path exists to an end station. This is
known as a loop. For example, in Figure 4-1, multiple paths can be taken
when forwarding a frame from device A to device Z.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
SAOS software 4-15

Figure 4-1
Ethernet Topology Example
A

Star Ring

Ladder

Ethernet traffic forwarding uses Media Access Control (MAC) addresses to


forward traffic. When an Ethernet device receives traffic that has a destination
MAC address that is unknown to the device, these frames are broadcast to all
the devices that it is linked to. This allows the intended destination device to
receive the traffic and then reply to the source device. When the first device
receives the reply, it then creates a forwarding entry for the destination
address. The next time traffic is encountered with that destination address, the
device can forward it directly to the correct port without having to broadcast
the frame to all egress ports.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configuration


Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP - IEEE 802.1Q-2005) is a standards
based version of creating multiple spanning trees where each VLAN has its
own Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI). Each instance has an
independent spanning tree topology to provide multiple forwarding paths for
data traffic, enable load balancing and reduce the number of spanning tree
instances required to support a large number of VLANs. MSTP can be
implemented in place of Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-16 SAOS software

Like RSTP, defined in IEEE 802.1D, MSTP provides a loop-free topology in


bridged networks and delivers efficient reconfiguration (convergence) of the
loop-free topology in the event that a link fails. MSTP inherits its rapid
transition mechanism from RSTP, defined in IEEE 802.1W, to achieve fast
convergence times.

Ethernet Ring Protection Switching configuration


Ethernet Ring Protection Switching comprises logical rings and virtual rings.

Table 4-2 lists the number of ports, logical rings, and virtual rings by platform.

Table 4-2
Number of ports, logical rings and virtual rings by platform

Platform Number of ports Logical rings Virtual rings

3916 6 5 10

3930 10 9 18

3931 10 9 18

3932 10 9 18

3940 24 23 46

3960 12 11 22

5140 24 23 46

5142 24 23 46

5150 48 47 94

50 49 98

52 51 102

5160 24 23 46

Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance configuration


EOAM remote loopback is the ability to test link quality/performance and
isolate link faults by sending frames from one DTE and looping them back at
the other DTE. As such, loopback is an intrusive procedure and all normal port
operations such as forwarding and learning are disrupted. Any services
supported by the ports involved also cease to function. You can configure a
port to ignore loopback requests.

The port will go into remote loopback mode when:


EOAM is enabled globally.
EOAM is enabled on the port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
SAOS software 4-17

Loopback mode is initiated by the remote bridge.

EOAM loopback can only be initiated by DTEs that are configured for OAM
Active mode. Active mode DTEs can be switched to loopback mode. In rare
cases when two Active mode DTEs simultaneously issue loopback
commands for the other DTE, one of the DTEs drops its request and accepts
the remote DTEs command.

802.3ah OAM monitors a link for critical events and then puts the remote
device into loopback mode to test on the link. OAM functions can be
implemented once two directly connected DTEs become aware of each
others OAM capabilities. This is made possible through an OAM discovery
process.

Discovery is the process by which the OAM capabilities of peer OAM-enabled


entities are discovered. Information OAM Protocols Data Units (OAMPDUs)
are used to exchange OAM capability information. In addition, the flags field
in the OAMPDU header is used to indicate the current state of OAM discovery.
Once discovery is successful, other OAM messages/commands can be
exchanged between peer OAM entities. The discovery process re-starts
automatically if an OAM entity does not receive an Information OAMPDU from
the peer OAM entity within 5 seconds.

Event logging configuration


Event logging comprises:
Syslog
flash log filters
flash log packet filters
RAM log filters
RAM log packet filters
command logging

Bidirectional Forwarding Detection


Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) is a protocol that provides low-
overhead, fast detection of link or node failure between any two nodes running
over any medium.
BFD control packets are transmitted in UDP packets with well-known
destination port 3784 within an IPv4 packet.
As an intermediate node of an Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
Label Switch Path (LSP), the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3960, and 5150 platforms
run BFD over an IPv4 network to the next hop neighbor (RFC 5880).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-18 SAOS software

As the end node of a MPLS LSP or Label Edge Router (LER), the 3916,
3930, 3931, 3960, and 5150 platforms use BFD to support MPLS LSPs.
BFD packet content is encapsulated in a MPLS label stack and sent along
the same data path as the LSP through multiple hops to its eventual
destination (RFC 6428).

A very fast Continuity Check (CC) detects a loss of connectivity between


two end nodes with detection times in the few tens of milliseconds.
Connectivity Verification (CV) verifies that a 3916, 3930, 3931, 3960, or
5150 source node is connected to the desired end node.
CC and CV failures are reported so appropriate action can be taken (for
example, switching to a backup path).
MPLS-BFD implements a single-session BFD over an associated
bidirectional LSP, constructed from a pair of unidirectional LSPs, one in each
direction. The two LSPs operate virtually as one single entity for the purpose
of protection and switching.

A BFD session begins with the periodic, slow transmission (one second
intervals) of control packets between nodes. In the initial message exchanges,
the nodes exchange state information and their respective discriminator fields
(which identifies the session) and negotiate the desired transmit and receive
intervals. Subsequent control packets sent from each side must reflect the
discriminator values back to the originating node in the Your Discriminator
field.

Once two-way communication is achieved and the session is in the Up state,


periodic BFD control packets are transmitted at the transmit interval
negotiated in the initial packet exchange, and each packet either updates or
reiterates the session state information to the other node.

Virtual Link Loss Indicator


VLLI allows network elements at the UNI-N of an EVC to signal to the UNI-C
of the customer premise equipment (CPE) if:
The remote UNI attachment interface has failed or recovered.
The EVC connection has failed or recovered causing end-to-end client
traffic to be transported.

An instance represents an application service, for example, CFM service. It


can be either source or destination. The Instance can trigger the action of
other Instances in the same instance group. Each Instance links to an action
group.

VLLI configuration requires configuring:


instance groups

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
SAOS software 4-19

action groups

An instance group represents a VLLI operation group. It contains multiple


instances. Since each instance is bound to an action group, source actions
can be triggered based on the event type if bidirectional is configured.

An action group is a group of actions.

VLLI support unidirectional and bidirectional operation on the same instance


group.

Fault management troubleshooting


Fault management troubleshooting comprises sending log test messages and
resetting log file configuration to defaults.

Performance management
This section describes the protocols and techniques used in 39XX/51XX
Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches to monitor and improve
performance.

TWAMP
TWAMP provides a way for network administrators to quickly measure latency
and jitter between two devices with real-time processing. A TWAMP session
must run between two different nodes. As each TWAMP session is initiated,
a check is performed to ensure that this session is not aimed at an IP address
or MAC address that belongs to the initiating node. This includes the IP
address configured for the local interface, remote interface and any other
configured IP interfaces. TWAMP can be run over IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.

Note: TWAMP IPv4 configurations remain intact over a software upgrade


or downgrade. TWAMP IPv6 configurations are removed during a
downgrade.

As defined in RFC4656, One-Way Active Measurement Protocol (OWAMP)


measures uni-directional IP performance between two devices. Based upon
OWAMP, TWAMP provides bi-directional measurements of IP performance
between two devices through an exchange of test messages. The system
software supports the following TWAMP modes:
TWAMP Light Responder
TWAMP Complete Server
TWAMP Client

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-20 SAOS software

CPU rate limiting


Network protocol control frames require examination and processing from the
Central Processing Unit (CPU). When the CPU must process a large volume
of control frames per second, all CPU resources are consumed. This overload
causes the CLI and SNMP to become unresponsive.

To prevent this issue, you can control the number of protocol control frames
to be processed with CPU rate limiting.

Performance benchmarking
39XX/51XX switches can evaluate the performance of network devices by
means of testing that conforms to the following standards:
Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) RFC 2544 Benchmarking
Methodology for Network Interconnect Devices
International Telecommunications Union Standardization (ITU-T) Y.1564
Ethernet Service Activation Test Methodology

Table 4-3 lists the benchmarking tests supported by 39XX/51XX switches.

Table 4-3
Benchmarking tests supported by 39XX/15XX switches

Test RFC 2544 Y.1564

Throughput (IR) X X

Frame Loss (FLR) X X

Delay (FD) X X

Delay Variation (IFDV) X

Variable Test Duration X

Per-VLAN X

1/10 GE Line Rate Test X X

Rapid Results X

Additionally, 39XX/51XX switches support in-service tests.

Operational roles
Devices running benchmark tests operate in the following operational roles.

Generator
Generates RFC 2544 test packets. The Generator IP address is the source IP
address in the packet and the Analyzer IP address is the destination IP
address.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
SAOS software 4-21

Note: The 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, and 5160 platforms support the
generator role.

The 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142 and 5160 platforms can generate IPv6 test
packets. If the test packets layer 3 fields (source and destination IP
addresses) and layer 4 fields (source and destination UDP or TCP ports) need
to be swapped, then the target reflector must also be from the same group of
platforms, or a third-party device that supports the version of IP test packets
being transmitted. If the test traffic is only going through a layer 2 network,
then the reflector node can also be a 3960 or a 5150 device.

UNI reflector
The UNI reflector mechanism supports the functionality to run a complete test
session from a single node in the network by receiving the test packet,
swapping various fields within the packet, and sending the packet back to the
generator using the original source address found in the packet. Ciena
devices in the UNI reflector role inter operate with other vendor RFC 2544 test
implementations and equipment. The following fields (if they exist) are
swapped in the RFC2544 test packet during reflection:

Ethernet Source and Destination MAC Addresses


IP Source and Destination Addresses
UDP Source and Destination Port Numbers.

Note: The 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160
platforms support the UNI reflector role.

The 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932 and 5142 platforms support full reflection of IPv6
packets. The 3960 and 5150 platforms reflect IPv6 packets by swapping Layer
2 fields. The 5160 platform does not support the reflection of IPv6 traffic.

The 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932 and 5142 platforms can be used to generate
traffic while the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142 or 5150 platforms can be
used to reflect IPv6 traffic going through a Layer 2 network. For Layer 3 IPv6
traffic, the reflector node must be a 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932 or 5142 platform.

The 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142 and 5160 platforms support Layer 2, Layer
3 and Layer 4 relevant fields. The 3960 and 5150 platforms only swap Layer
2 fields. The 3916, 3930, 3931 and 3932 platforms recognize IPv6 frames and
will swap appropriate fields at Layer 2 and Layer 4.

Static Reflector
The static reflector mechanism supports minimal packet reflection to support
end-to-end test session from a single node in the network by receiving the test
packet, modifying it to swap the source and destination MAC addresses,

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
4-22 SAOS software

reflecting it back to the network using Layer 3 static IP routing. Ciena devices
in the static reflector role inter operate with other vendor RFC 2544 test
implementations and equipment.

Note: Layer 3 static reflector does not support IPv6.

The 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, and 5160 platforms can operate as
generators to run tests between 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150,
and 5160 platforms operating as UNI reflectors.

Also, 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, and 5160 platforms can operate as
generators to test 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3940, 3960, 5140, 5142, 5150, or
5160 platforms operating as static reflectors.

In addition, Ciena devices interoperate with other vendor RFC 2544 and
Y.1564 test implementations and equipment.

Performance monitoring
Performance monitoring is an in-service, non-intrusive method of statistical
data collection used for fault detection and troubleshooting. These statistics
are based on time intervals and data counts to determine transmission quality.

Performance monitoring monitors TDM statistics on the 3932 system. Up to


200 performance monitoring Instances can be created for each system.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5-1

3902 Service Delivery Switch 5-

Note: The 3902 is not supported by this release. The 3902 uses SAOS
Release 6.10. This product is included in this document in order to provide
a complete summary of the portfolio.

The 3902 is an entry-level business demarcation device in the Ciena SDS


portfolio. The 3902 can provide low-cost Ethernet Private Line (EPL), Ethernet
Virtual Private Line (EVPL), and Ethernet LAN services. It can be deployed in
office, Point of Presence (POP), and Central Office (CO) locations.

The 3902 is a small and quiet unit suitable for installation in indoor
applications. It can be installed on a desktop or wall mounted using Customer
supplied hardware. The 3902 is powered by an external AC adapter. All ports,
LEDs and power connections are accessible from the front of the 3902.
See Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1
3902 Top View

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5-2 3902 Service Delivery Switch

Installation instructions for the 3902 are available in 3902 Hardware


Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3205-001).

The 3902 has the following physical characteristics:


1 x 1000 Mbps SFP port This port is the NNI port of the 3902 and can
be customized using different SFPs suitable for your application.
1 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 port This port is the UNI port of the 3902.
1 x RJ-45 Console port The Console port is used for initial configuration
and management.
AC brick power supply Multiple external AC power supplies are
available to accommodate deployments in different countries.
Small clamshell form factor The small unit is suitable for desktop or wall
mount installations.
Hardware Overview
The 3902 is a small SDS. The small form-factor unit is designed so that all the
user and management interfaces are located on the front of the unit. Table 5-1
provides a quick overview of the interfaces available on the 3902 and Figure
5-1 on page 5-1 provides a view of the 3902.

Table 5-1
3902 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Ports Description

NNI 1 1000 Mbps port with SFP connector.

UNI 1 10/100/1000 Mbps port with RJ-45 connector.

Console 1 Serial EIA-561 (RJ-45) port.

Chassis Size and Weight


Table 5-2 provides a summary of the system dimensions and weight.

Table 5-2
3902 Chassis Size and Weight

Attribute Value (Metric) Value (Imperial)

Width 15.1 cm 5.96 inches

Depth 15 cm 5.9 inches

Height 3.1 cm 1.21 inches

Weight 0.3 kg 0.56 pounds

Note: The weight provided here is for the 3902 chassis only. The power supply is
an external AC brick power supply and is not included in the weight figure.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3902 Service Delivery Switch 5-3

Mounting
The 3902 has the following mounting options:
Desktop
Wall Mount
Desktop Mount
The 3902 has rubber feet and can be installed on a desktop.

Wall Mount
The 3902 unit has anchor points that can be used to mount the system on a
wall using customer provided mounting hardware. The recommended wall
mount orientation is to position the 3902 so that the faceplate of the unit is
facing downward.

When the unit is wall mounted, it is assumed that it will be mounted on indoor
drywall or plywood backed surfaces. Ensure that the hardware used includes
the proper fasteners/anchors required to support the weight of the unit.

In addition, fasteners may be used to support the weight of the AC power


supply and cabling that attaches to the unit.

See Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2
3902 Bottom View

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5-4 3902 Service Delivery Switch

Power Options
The 3902 uses a single external brick style AC power supply. The AC power
supply supports the following range of input voltages: 100V to 240V, 47 Hz to
63 Hz. The AC/DC converter on the module provides 5V DC at 2.5 Amps to
the 3902. The power supply is connected using a modular jack on the right
side of the faceplate labeled 5V DC. The 3902 unit has a power cord retainer
to assist with strain relief for the power cord.

Multiple AC power supplies are available to support installations in different


countries. The following list provides a summary of the currently supported
power supplies:
AC power supply Australia
AC power supply Europe
AC power supply North America
AC power supply United Kingdom
Environmental Control
The 3902 is designed for deployment in indoor temperature controlled
locations. Table 5-3 provides a summary of the operating environment.

Table 5-3
3902 Operating Environment

Attribute Value (Metric) Value (Imperial)

Operating Temperature Range 0 C to +40 C 32 F to 104 F

Storage Temperature Range -5 C to +60 C 23 F to 140 F

Operating Humidity Range 15 % to 85 % non-condensing

The 3902 does not have any fans. As such, the unit is extremely quiet.
However, when installing the unit avoid installation sites with nearby heat
sources since they may negatively impact the 3902 system.

Grounding
The 3902 is connected to ground through the power supply. A safety ground
connection is provided by the AC power cord.

WARNING
The 3902 relies on the AC power cord for Safety ground. The
outlet providing power to the 3902 must meet the Local and
National Safety codes.

The 3902 does not have a separate supplemental ground connection.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3902 Service Delivery Switch 5-5

Resets
The 3902 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is located
between the power connection and the NNI port. Figure 5-3 on page 5-5
shows the location of the reset button.

Figure 5-3
Location of the Reset Button on the 3902

Reset Button

There are two different types of resets available:


Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than three seconds. A quick reset reboots the system with the current
saved configuration.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for three
seconds or more continuously. A hard reset erases the current
configuration and restores the unit to the factory default settings. See
Default configuration overview on page 18-1 for more information about
the factory default settings.
Note: It is also possible to initiate soft resets of the system through the
local console port, or the management VLAN. Instructions for initiating a
soft reset are included in the 39XX/51XX Command Reference (009-
3220-010).

Default Configuration
If the 3902 does not have an operational configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
CES portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview on page 18-1.
See that chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5-6 3902 Service Delivery Switch

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 3902 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit and the
interfaces have integrated LEDs which provide status information for the port.

Figure 5-4
Front view of the 3902

Figure 5-4 shows the faceplate of the unit and identifies the locations of the
different ports. More detailed LED information is provided in 3902 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3205-001).

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each port available
on the 3902 including:
Gigabit Ethernet Port
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Port
Console Port (EIA-561)
Gigabit Ethernet Port
The 3902 has a single Gigabit Ethernet port. This port is located on the right
side of the faceplate and is labeled 1G.

This port is SFP-based and is the NNI port in the system. The port
characteristics are set by the capabilities of the SFP that is installed. The SFP
port conforms to the IEEE 803.3z Gigabit Ethernet standard.

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported SFPs is


documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).

10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Port


The 3902 has a single RJ-45 copper port supporting 10/100/1000 Mbps
operation with auto-negotiation of speed and duplex as well as auto-MDI/
MDIX. This port is located in the middle of the faceplate and is labeled 10/100/
1000.

The RJ-45 port is a GR-1089 Type 4 port and is intended for indoor use only.
This port is also fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard.
When connecting to the RJ-45 copper port a Cat 5 cable is recommended.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3902 Service Delivery Switch 5-7

Console Port (EIA-561)


The 3902 includes one serial port with RJ-45 connector for maintenance
purposes. This port is located on the left side of the faceplate and is labeled
Console.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the CES
portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1. See that
chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5-8 3902 Service Delivery Switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-1

3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-

Note: The 3911 is not supported by this release. The 3911 uses SAOS
Release 6.10. This product is included in this document in order to provide
a complete summary of the portfolio.

Cienas 3911 is an Ethernet access system that cost-effectively delivers


business, transport, and wireless backhaul Ethernet services via fiber or
copper connections. The 3911 features an environmentally sealed and
physically secure enclosure suitable for deployment outdoors or in
unconditioned indoor environments, enabling support for a wide variety of
service application scenarios and network topologies.

The 3911 is based on Ciena Corporations field-proven Carrier Ethernet


technology and is deployed by dozens of network operators in tens-of-
thousands of homes and businesses.

The 3911 is designed to work in concert with other Ciena Corporation


products and operate in an extended temperature range.

The 3911 can be installed with an optional UNI Access Module (UAM). The
UAM provides lightning and power-cross protection and can extend the range
of sites where a 3911 can be installed.

Both the UAM and 3911 provide Customer access to the UNI ports. When the
front panel of the 3911 is opened, the Customer will be able to see both the
UNI ports and the Craft access port. When the Customer access panel of the
UAM is opened, the Customer will be provided with access to the UNI ports
only. Thus, the UAM provides additional security to the service provider by
restricting access to the Craft port.

Hardware Overview
The 3911 (Ciena part number 170-3911-900) is an Ethernet SDS. Both AC
and DC power options are available. When the 3911 is installed outdoors, the
UAM is used to house the hardened AC or DC power supply.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-2 3911 Service Delivery Switch

The 3911 meets class A radiated emissions requirements with standard Cat5
UTP cables. To meet class B radiated emissions, the use of Cat5 STP
(shielded) cables is required.

Table 6-1 on page 6-2 provides an overview of the components in a 3911.

Table 6-1
3911 System Component Summary

Component Notes

3911 Enclosure and 3911 in an environmentally hardened enclosure.


System

UAM (optional) Two versions:


Universal (use with hardened AC or DC power supply)
IEC (use with hardened AC power supply only)

Conduit Adapter Kit Used to attach the conduit to the UAM.


(optional)

Power Module Multiple options:


Universal hardened DC
Universal hardened AC
Indoor AC (120V, 220V or Wide-range 120/240V)
An optional Battery Back-up/UPS Subsystem is also available.

Line Protection Used to provide lighting and power-cross protection for outside plant
Module installations. The Line Protection Module is installed in the UAM. Two versions:
2 port
4 port

Optical UNI Module Used to provide optical connectivity to the 3911 in outside plant installations.
The Optical UNI Module is installed in the UAM. Multiple versions are available:
Single Mode
Multi Mode (50 m)
Multi Mode (62.5 m)
All units provide a single optical UNI connection to the 3911.

Mounting kits Multiple options:


Wall mount
Pole mount kit
Pole mount band clamps
H-Frame mount

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-3

The 3911 can be installed with a UAM or in a standalone configuration. An


overview of the two configurations will be presented. Further details of the
various components will be provided later in this chapter.

3911 and UAM


The UAM allows you to harden the system, providing power and lightning
surge protection as well as housing the hardened power supply. The UAM
also allows you to control access. Customers only have access to the user
ports and the rest of the system is secured. A UAM is required for outdoor
installations, though they may also be used indoors. Two types of UAM are
available, Universal (AC/DC) and IEC (AC only). Select the type of UAM that
matches the power source available at your site.

For installations of a 3911 and UAM you need to order the following
components:
3911
UAM two types are available, Universal (AC or DC power) and IEC (AC
power)
Line Protection Modules (two are available, 2-port or 4-port) or Optical UNI
(two are available, Multi Mode and Single Mode)
Power source two power options are available: Hardened AC
(Universal UAM or IEC UAM) and Hardened DC (Universal UAM only)
UPS (optional) provides battery back-up
Mounting hardware, as required. Outdoor installations can be mounted on
round pole, square pole, H-frame or wall. See Mounting on page 6-11 for
more information.
UAM Conduit Adapter Kit (optional) can be used to assist with connecting
the 3911 and UAM with the PVC carrying your wiring
Standalone 3911
If your installation site is indoors, then a standalone 3911 is an option.

Note: If you need to secure access to the site, a 3911 and UAM may be
more appropriate for your indoor application.

For installations of a standalone 3911 you need to order the following


components:
3911
UPS (optional)
Power source two indoor AC power supplies are available
Mounting hardware, as required. Indoor installations will use a wall mount
and the supplied mounting brackets. The customer will be required to
supply additional bolts/screws to securely mount the units to the wall.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-4 3911 Service Delivery Switch

3911 Enclosure and System


The 3911 is housed in an environmentally hardened enclosure suitable for
exterior mounting. These attributes provide an important savings in cost by
facilitating service provider access and eliminating the requirement for a
protected or conditioned operating environment.

Figure 6-1 shows the front and rear view of the chassis. Figure 6-2 shows a
3/4 view of the chassis and provides a better view of the conduit openings
available on the enclosure. The dimensions of the system are provided in
Chassis Size and Weight on page 6-10.

Figure 6-1
3911 Front and Rear Views

Front Rear

Figure 6-2
3911 Exterior Isometric View

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-5

Figure 6-3 shows the interior of the enclosure which is divided into 2 sections:
the upper portion, which is usually covered by an inner cover, houses
critical system components (UPS battery, fiber management tray, power
connections, etc.)
the lower portion, provides customer access to the Ethernet and
Telephone ports. The visual port and system status LEDs are also located
in the lower portion.
Figure 6-3
Interior of the 3911

Rubber Grommets
Rubber grommets are provided in the 3911 kit. These grommets can be
installed in the openings of the 3911 chassis. Figure 6-4 shows a grommet.

Figure 6-4
Rubber Grommet

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-6 3911 Service Delivery Switch

The grommets are installed by pinching them slightly and pressing them into
the available holes. When installed, they should fit securely.

For indoor applications, you can cut an opening in the grommet to allow wires
and cables to pass into the chassis. It is easiest to cut the opening in the
grommet before it is installed in the 3911 chassis.

For outdoor applications, weather tight conduit needs to be fitted to the


chassis to prevent moisture from entering the enclosure.

UAM
The UNI Access Module (UAM) is an optional component that can be installed
directly below the 3911. The UAM can be used to extend the range of sites
where a 3911 can be installed. The UAM provides:
AC or DC power for the 3911
outdoor power and lightning/surge protection
2 or 4 lightning/surge protected copper ports or 1 optical UNI port
door-on-door customer access to user ports
service provider access to power and user ports
Figure 6-5
UAM Front View

Service Provider Access Door

User Access Door


There are two versions of 3911 UAM that can be ordered:
Universal for use with AC or DC power supplies
IEC for use with the AC power supply only
Table 6-2 on page 6-7 provides a summary of the contents of the UAM kits.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-7

Table 6-2
UAM Kit Summary

Description IEC UAM Kit Universal UAM Kit

UAM with Terminal Strip for AC or DC


UAM with IEC hardware

Cable grommets for 4 holes (for indoor applications)


Conduit spacers for 3911 connections
Wall Mount Brackets, pre-assembled on the UAM chassis
Power and Ground cables for interconnection with the 3911
Security Hex Screws to replace existing non-security hardware if
desired

UAM Conduit Adapter Kit (Optional)


The UAM Conduit Adapter Kit is available to assist with connecting the 3911
and UAM with the PVC carrying your wiring. The UAM Conduit Adapter Kit
provides compatibility with 1 1/4 inch, 1 inch and 3/4 inch conduit. Table 6-3
provides a summary of the kit contents and Figure 6-6 on page 6-8 shows the
various components in the kit.

Use of this kit is optional. If desired, a non-Ciena solution can be used to


protect the power, ground and fiber connections coming into the system. You
should determine your cable routing and protection strategy when you
complete a site survey prior to ordering and installing your equipment.

Table 6-3
UAM Conduit Adapter Kit Summary

Item Number (in Figure 6-6) Item Description Quantity

1 Conduit Adapter Nut 3

2 Conduit Adapter O-ring Gasket 3

3 1 1/4 Conduit Adapter 3

4 1 Conduit Reducer 3

5 3/4 Conduit Reducer 3

6 Cable Gland Nut 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-8 3911 Service Delivery Switch

Table 6-3
UAM Conduit Adapter Kit Summary (continued)

Item Number (in Figure 6-6) Item Description Quantity

7 Cable Gland O-ring Gasket 1

8 Cable Gland 1

Note: The UAM Conduit Adapter Kit also contains the following items that are not pictured in Figure 6-6:
a compression ground lug suitable for use with the system, and
two weather caps that can be used to temporarily cover the Conduit Spacers on the top of the UAM
if there will be a break between mounting the UAM and mounting the 3911.

Figure 6-6
Conduit Adapter Kit Details

Line Protection Modules


The Line Protection Module provides lightning and power-cross protection for
the Ethernet ports in outdoor installations with conduit fed cabling. The Line
Protection Module is installed in the UAM and is accessed through the
Customer Door on the UAM.

Note: The UAM can house either a Line Protection Module or an Optical
UNI Module, since these modules are installed in the same location within
the UAM.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-9

Two protection modules are available:


2 port
4 port
Protection Module (2-port)
The 2-port module provides 2 Ethernet UNI ports with line protection. The kit
includes the following components:
2-port RJ-45 line protection module
2 x Cat-5e jumper cables (for connection to the 3911)
Ground cable (connects to the 3911)
Protection Module (4-port)
The 4-port module provides 4 Ethernet UNI ports with line protection. The kit
includes the following components:
4-port RJ-45 line protection module
4 x Cat-5e jumper cables (for connection to the 3911)
Ground cable (connects to the 3911)
Optical UNI Module
The Optical UNI Module provides a single optical UNI port for an outdoor
installation with conduit fed cabling. The Optical UNI Module is installed in the
UAM and is accessed through the Customer Door on the UAM.

Note: The UAM can house either a Line Protection Module or an Optical
UNI Module, since these modules are installed in the same location within
the UAM.

The following Optical UNI Modules are available:


Single Mode
Multi Mode (50 m)
Multi Mode (62.5 m)
All kits provide a single optical UNI port accessible in the UAM. The kit
includes the optical jumper cable required. The SFP must be ordered
separately. The list of supported SFPs is documented in Packet Networking
Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-10 3911 Service Delivery Switch

Chassis Size and Weight


The size of the 3911enclosure and UAM are summarized in Table 6-4.

Table 6-4
3911 Dimension Summary

Component Height Height Width Width Depth Depth


(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)

3911 only 17.21 43.7 16.14 41 6.37 16.2

UAM only 9.37 23.8 16.20 41.1 6.37 16.2

3911 and UAM (including 27.22 69.1 16.20 41.1 6.37 16.2
the conduit spacers
between the two units)
Note: The chassis should be mounted a minimum of 2 feet (61 cm) above grade.

Before you start, ensure that the mounting surface is capable of supporting
the weight of the system. Table 6-5 provides a list of the components that can
be used in a system and their weight.

Table 6-5
3911 Component Weight Summary

Component Weight (lbs) Weight (kg)

H-Frame Mounting Kit 3.90 1.77

Pole Mount Kit 9.77 4.43

3911 (without UPS battery) 24 10.89

3911 (with UPS battery) 30 13.6

UAM 6.17 2.8

Power Module 1.52 0.69

Line Protection Module or Optical UNI 1.12 0.51

Note: The approximate weight of a fully loaded 3911 and UAM with pole mount kit
is 50 lbs (22.68 kg).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-11

Mounting
When you are selecting a site for mounting a system you must ensure that it
is capable of supporting the weight of the unit. The system must be mounted
at least 2 feet (61 cm) above grade. See Chassis Size and Weight on page
6-10 for more information.

There are a number of mounting options for the 3911 and UAM. Table 6-6
provides a summary. Complete mounting instructions are provided in 3911
and UAM Hardware Installation Manual (009-3228-001).

Table 6-6
3911 Mounting Kit Summary

Mounting Location Item Description Not Included

Wallmount Uses brackets and template provided with the Wall mount screws (7
3911 and UAM screws, #12 or 1/4
maximum))

Polemount Mounting kit for 8 to 20 diameter poles or 6x6 Band clamps


square posts. Includes: Lag bolts (2 screws, 1/4 x
1 x Top Support Bracket 3 wood lag screws) used for
1 x Vertical Support Structure square pole mount only

2 x Horizontal Supports
Screws for mounting 3911 and UAM Pole
Clamps

Polemount Clamps Band clamps for use with the Polemount kit.
Addresses poles up to 12 diameter.
Larger poles require 2 kits.
Clamp kit includes:
3 x clamps

H-Frame Mount Mount kit for generic H-Frame. Includes: Bolts for mounting to H-
1 x Horizontal Support Bracket Frame

2 x Vertical Bracket
Screws for mounting 3911 and UAM

Note: When mounting the 3911 and UAM on a wall, correctly positioning the screw holes is essential.
The document 3911 Mounting Template Artwork (009-2009-234) is a template for assistance mounting
the 3911 and UAM to a wall. Before you start, you should verify a few of the measurements on the
template with your measuring tape to ensure that the document has been printed to the correct scale.
Note: The H-Frame Mount Kit is required to connect with at least 2 horizontal support channels of your
H-Frame structure. The channels should be spaced between 13 and 23 apart. The preferred spacing
is 18.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-12 3911 Service Delivery Switch

Power Options
The 3911 can use either AC or DC power input to operate. In addition, since
the unit can be installed in either indoor or exterior applications, both indoor
and hardened power supplies are available. Table 6-7 provides a summary.

Table 6-7
3911 Power Module Summary

Part Number Item Description Notes

PWER-001403 Universal Hardened DC power supply +/- 24/36/48 Volts DC input


11-15 Volts DC output
Fully hardened in its own separate
enclosure (UAM)

PWER-001404 Universal Hardened AC power supply +100 to +240 Volts AC input


11-15 Volts DC output
Fully hardened in its own separate
enclosure (UAM)

PWER-001401 120 Volts AC input Indoor applications only

PWER-001405 Wide-range 120/240 Volt AC module Indoor applications only


TP 76200 MP compliant

PWER-0018UP Battery Back-up/UPS Subsystem Kit includes:


Battery charger
Battery bracket
Battery
Cables

Note: Third party power supplies must not be used.

Hardened Power Supplies


Outdoor applications require the use of a hardened power supply. The power
supply must also be installed in the UAM. Ciena offers two hardened power
supplies. See Table 6-7 for details.

Indoor Power Supplies


Indoor installations do not require the use of a hardened power supply and
can use one of the indoor brick style AC power supplies. A UAM is not
required for the power supply. Ciena offers two indoor use power supplies.
See Table 6-7 for details.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-13

Optional UPS
The UPS is an optional component that can be installed in the upper right
portion of the 3911 chassis. As a result, UPS units can be used in 3911
systems installed as standalone units and 3911 systems installed with a UAM.

The UPS is compatible with installations using an Optical UNI Module or a


Line Protection Module.

Since the UPS is optional, it may not have been installed when the 3911
system was installed. It is possible to install a UPS at a later date to enhance
the power reliability of the system.

Ciena has offered two different designs of battery tray as follows:


One piece battery tray The original battery tray was a single piece.
When this tray is used the entire battery tray is removed to replace the
battery. This procedure also requires unplugging the cabling leading to the
UPS module, as well as additional cabling such as the Optical UNI cable
(if present). See Figure 6-7.
Battery tray with removable plate This revised battery tray has a
removable plate on the front of the battery tray. When this tray is used,
only the front plate is removed to replace the battery. The cabling to the
UPS module and optical UNI (if present) are not disturbed. See Figure
6-7.
Figure 6-7
Battery Tray Comparison
One Piece Battery Tray Battery Tray with Removable Plate

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-14 3911 Service Delivery Switch

Environmental Control
The 3911 and UAM are designed for outside plant installations. The system
meets the following temperature requirements:
-40 C to 65 C (-40 F to 149 F)
Telcordia GR-487 (46 C ambient plus solar load)
Telcordia GR-63
Telcordia GR-3108
The operating humidity range is 0% to 100% humidity, condensing.

Grounding a Standalone 3911 System


Note: The 3911 can be installed as a standalone system or with a UAM.
The grounding procedures differ for these two types of installation. See
3911 and UAM Hardware Installation Manual (009-3228-001) for detailed
procedures.

The grounding lug is provided with the 3911 chassis. You are required to
provide the grounding wire (#6 AWG minimum) for the external ground
connection.

The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines, and the grounding procedures used by your
company.

The DC resistance between the chassis and the external ground source
should be verified to be less than 25 milliohms.

Figure 6-8 shows the grounding connection point, installed grounding lug and
the sticker which indicates the ground location.

Figure 6-8
3911 Chassis Ground

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-15

Grounding a 3911 and UAM System


Note: The 3911 can be installed as a standalone system or with a UAM.
The grounding procedures differ for these two types of installation. See
3911 and UAM Hardware Installation Manual (009-3228-001) for detailed
procedures.

Installations with both a 3911 and UAM have the following grounding
connections:
External ground connection to the UAM. See External Ground on page
6-15 for more information.
Note: The factory installed grounding lug is not used with installations that
have a UAM. The same grounding location is used, however a customer
supplied grounding lug is used instead.

Internal ground connection between the UAM and the 3911. Figure 6-11
on page 6-17 shows the installed grounding lug in the 3911.
Safety ground (IEC UAM only) is an optional grounding connection that
links the safety ground of the IEC plug to the grounding plate. Figure 6-9
on page 6-16 shows the location of the safety ground and Figure 6-10 on
page 6-16 shows the installed quick connect grounding tab.
Line Protection Module ground that connects the Line Protection Module
to the grounding plate (connected as part of Installing the Line Protection
Module).
External Ground
When the 3911 is being installed with a UAM you are required to provide the
grounding lug and grounding wire for the external ground connection. The
following description indicates the required specifications:
#6 AWG (minimum) wire
2 hole lug @ 1 centers and with hole size for #10 or 1/4 screw
The Optional Conduit Adapter Kit contains a compression ground lug suitable
for use with the UAM. If you are not using the optional kit, you will need to
supply a ground lug. Figure 6-9 on page 6-16 shows the two possible
installation locations for the external ground connection on the IEC UAM
Grounding Plate.

The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines, and the grounding procedures used by your
company.

The DC resistance between the chassis and the external ground source
should be verified to be less than 25 milliohms.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-16 3911 Service Delivery Switch

Figure 6-9
Grounding Connections (IEC UAM Grounding Plate)
IEC Plug

Ground Plate

Internal Ground

Safety Ground
(Optional)

External Ground Line Protection


(2 locations shown) Module Ground

Figure 6-10
Installed Quick Connect Grounding Tab (IEC UAM Grounding Plate)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-17

Figure 6-11
Installed 3911 Internal Ground

Figure 6-12
Installed Line Protection Module (Universal UAM shown)

Line Protection Module

Ground Connection

Ground Plate

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-18 3911 Service Delivery Switch

Resets
The 3911 has a reset button. There are two different types of resets available:
Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than two seconds. A quick reset reboots the system and retains the
current configuration.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for four
seconds or more continuously. A hard reset erases the current
configuration and restores the unit to the factory default settings.
You will need to remove the internal cover to access the reset button. The
reset button is located on the bottom left area of the main system board,
between the PWR and STAT LEDs. Figure 6-13 on page 6-18 shows the
general location of the reset button.

Figure 6-13
Location of the 3911 Reset Button

Reset
Button

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3911 Service Delivery Switch 6-19

To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button, it is recessed behind the


faceplate of the main system board. You will need a small plastic tool to
depress the reset button. Figure 6-14 on page 6-19 shows a close up view of
the reset button.

Figure 6-14
Close-up View of the 3911 Reset Button

Reset
Button

Default Configuration
If the 3911 does not have an operational configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
CES portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview on page 18-1.
See that chapter for additional information.

Interfaces
This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 3911 including:
100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
Console Port
Only Ciena approved SFP transceivers can be used. Both Dual Fiber and
Single Fiber optics are available. In addition, there are some extended
temperature range optics. Extended temperature range optics are rated for
the temperature range -40 C to + 85 C (-40 F to 185 F). The list of supported
SFPs is documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-
2011-602).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
6-20 3911 Service Delivery Switch

100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports


The NNI ports are used to connect to the service providers network and
support 100 Mbps and 1 Gbps operating speeds. These ports can be either
an SFP or an RJ-45 port. The NNI ports are numbered as follows:
port 9 left optical or RJ-45 port
port 10 right optical or RJ-45 port
Note: For copper connections to the RJ-45 NNI port, the use of Cat5 STP
(shielded) cables is required. When a copper SFP is installed in these
ports the only supported speed is 1000 Mbps.

By default the system is configured to use the SFP connection, but this
configuration can be changed through the CLI.

The optical NNI ports can also be used as UNI ports. When an Optical UNI
Module is installed, one of optical ports 9 or 10 is used to connect the UNI port
from the Optical UNI Module. You will need to configure the optical port as a
UNI port using the CLI. In this configuration, the NNI port can be either the
remaining optical NNI port, or an RJ-45 NNI port. However, if an optical port
is being used as a UNI port, the RJ-45 port with the same port number cannot
be used as an NNI port. For example, if the Optical UNI Module is connected
to optical port 9, the NNI port can be either optical port 10 or RJ-45 port 10.

When you are using the optical ports, you will need to order SFPs to support
your configuration. Make sure you order the correct SFP (multi mode or single
mode) to match the equipment terminating the optical link.

10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports


The UNI ports are used to connect to the customers network and support 10,
100, 1000 Mbps operating speeds. The UNI ports are RJ-45 ports and they
are numbered ports 1 to 8 in the system.

It is also possible to use one of the optical NNI ports (ports 9 and 10) as an
optical UNI port. For more information, see 100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
on page 6-20.

Console Port
The 3911 also includes an external serial console port for EIA-232
communication on the front of the device labeled EIA-232 Console. The
console port can be used to attach a terminal or a PC to the device for out-of-
band management.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the CES
portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1. See that
chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
7-1

3916 Service Delivery Switch 7-

Cienas 3916 is an advanced Carrier Ethernet demarcation switch that offers


sophisticated OAM capabilities, wire-speed L2 switching and a SAOS in a
cost-effective and compact (1RU) form factor. These attributes make the 3916
a perfect fit for Ethernet Business Services applications.

The 3916 small SDS is a low port count Carrier Ethernet platform providing
premium Ethernet capability and targeting highly competitive Network
Termination and Intelligent Demarcation applications. Multiple versions of the
3916 are available. All of the systems have the same port count, but the
following items differ between systems:
Chassis size both standard and mini chassis sizes are available. The
dimensions are as follows:
Standard Chassis dimensions: 13.1 inches x 7.9 inches x 1.75 inches
(33.3 cm x 20.1 cm x 4.4 cm)
Mini chassis dimensions: 10.85 inches x 6.78 inches x 1.71 inches
(27.6 cm x 17.2 cm x 4.3 cm)
Power system both AC and DC systems are available. As well, the AC
system is available in both single or dual variants. In all systems the power
connections are integrated and accessed on the front faceplate.
Airflow the airflow in the chassis differs between the standard and mini
chassis as follows:
Standard Chassis: airflow is side to side, drawing air from the right side
and exhausting air to the left of the chassis.
Mini chassis: airflow is front to back, drawing air from the front
faceplate and exhausting air to the rear of the chassis.
Table 7-1 on page 7-2 provides a summary.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
7-2 3916 Service Delivery Switch

Table 7-1
3916 System Summary

System Part Number Power System Chassis Size Airflow

3916 AC Standard 170-3916-900 Single AC Standard Side to Side (right to left)

3916 Dual AC 170-3916-902 Dual AC Standard Side to Side (right to left)


Standard

3916 DC Standard 170-3916-901 Single DC Standard Side to Side (right to left)

3916 AC Mini 170-3916-904 Single AC Mini Front to back

3916 Dual AC Mini 170-3916-906 Dual AC Mini Front to back

Hardware Overview
The 3916 is a low port count Ethernet SDS. Both AC and DC power options
are available.

The product is designed so that the power connections and all the user and
management interfaces are located on the front of the chassis. Table 7-2 on
page 7-2 provides a quick overview of the interfaces available on the 3916.

Figure 7-1 on page 7-3 shows the 3916 standard chassis. Figure 7-2 on page
7-3 shows the 3916 mini chassis.

Table 7-2
3916 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Description


Ports

NNI/UNI 2 100/1000 Mbps ports with SFP connectors. These are ports 3 and 4.

NNI/UNI 2 1000 Mbps ports with SFP connectors. These are ports 5 and 6.

UNI 2 10/100/1000 Mbps combo RJ-45/SFP ports. The SFPs support both 100
Mbps and 1000 Mbps speeds. These are ports 1 and 2.
The combo ports have both a copper and an optical version of the same
port. Both ports can be cabled, however only one of the pair of copper/
optic ports will be active at any time. The combo ports are controlled
through the software.

Console 1 Serial EIA-561 (RJ-45) port

Note: For the combo ports, only one of the two ports will be active. Either the copper or the optical port
will be active.
Note: Only Ciena approved SFPs can be used with the 3916. For more information see Packet
Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3916 Service Delivery Switch 7-3

Figure 7-1
View of the 3916 (Standard Chassis)
3916 AC Standard

3916 DC Standard

3916 Dual AC Standard

Figure 7-2
View of the 3916 (Mini Chassis)
3916 Single AC Mini

3916 Dual AC Mini

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
7-4 3916 Service Delivery Switch

Chassis Size and Weight


The chassis of the 3916 occupies 1 rack unit (RU) of a standard 19-inch
equipment frame, allowing up to 42 devices in a single frame.

The chassis is designed so that the power cabling and all interface cabling is
located on the faceplate of the chassis. Ground is provided by the power
cable.

Table 7-3 on page 7-4 provides a summary of the system dimensions. Table
7-4 on page 7-5 provides a summary of the system weights.

Note: Before you start, ensure that the frame or mounting surface (wall
mount installations) is capable of supporting the weight of the system.

Table 7-3
3916 Chassis Size (Standard and Mini Chassis systems)

Standard Chassis Mini Chassis


Attribute
Value (Metric) Value (Imperial) Value (Metric) Value (Imperial)

Width 33.3 cm 13.1 inches 27.6 cm 10.85 inches

Depth 20.1 cm 7.9 inches 17.2 cm 6.78 inches

Height 4.4 cm 1.75 inches 4.3 cm 1.71 inches

Note: To provide sufficient clearance for cabling and airflow, Ciena recommends the following
clearances:
Rear of chassis: 0.5 cm (0.2 inches)
Front of chassis: 7.6 cm (3 inches)
Sides of chassis: 7.6 cm (3 inches)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3916 Service Delivery Switch 7-5

Table 7-4
3916 Chassis Weight Summary

System Description Weight (kg) Weight (lbs)

3916 AC Standard Single integrated front fixed AC power supply. 2.3 5.1
Standard chassis size.

3916 DC Standard Single integrated front fixed DC power supply.


Standard chassis size.

3916 Dual AC Standard Two integrated front fixed AC power supplies. 2.7 6
Standard chassis size.

3916 AC Mini Single integrated front fixed AC power supply. 1.41 3.1
Mini chassis size.

3916 Dual AC Mini Single integrated front fixed DC power supply. 1.6 3.5
Mini chassis size.

Mounting
The 3916 can be mounted in a frame or on a wall. The 19-inch bracket that is
included with the unit can be used for both frame mounting and wall mounting.
The bracket is L-shaped, and is installed in different orientations depending
on the mounting surface as follows:
Frame installations the bracket is installed so that the tab of the bracket
is flush with the front of the unit.
Wall mount installations the bracket is installed so that the tab of the
bracket is flush with the top or bottom of the unit, depending on right or left
orientation. See Figure 7-3 on page 7-5.

Alternatively, the 3916 can be placed on a desktop surface. The 3916 includes
4 rubber feet for desktop use. These feet are self-adhesive and can easily be
applied to the corners on bottom of the chassis.

Figure 7-3
3916 Installed Mounting Brackets - Wall Mount Orientation (3916 AC Standard system shown)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
7-6 3916 Service Delivery Switch

Mounting brackets
The following mounting brackets are available:
19-inch frame (this bracket is part of the 3916 kit)
23-inch frame (this bracket is separately orderable)
The brackets are attached to the chassis using two screw holes per bracket.

The frame mount brackets are also compatible with cable support brackets
that are designed to keep cables out of adjacent equipment space. See 3916
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3226-001) for more
information.

Wall mount installations


For wall mount applications, the 19-inch frame mount bracket can be used to
mount the 3916 to the wall. The required wall mount orientation is to position
the 3916 so that the fans on the right side of the chassis are located at the
bottom of the unit. The front of the chassis can face right or left as required,
depending on whether the top or bottom of the chassis is facing the wall.

Hardware required to attach the mounting bracket to the wall is Customer


supplied. The reinforced mounting surface should be capable of supporting
approximately 6 pounds. Ensure that the hardware used includes the proper
fasteners/anchors required to support the weight of the unit.

Desktop installations
The 3916 can be placed on a desktop surface. The 3916 includes 4 rubber
feet for desktop use. These feet are self-adhesive and can easily be applied
to the corners on bottom of the chassis. The installation surface must be a
non-combustible surface.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3916 Service Delivery Switch 7-7

Power Options
There are AC and DC powered variants of the 3916. Table 7-5 provides a
summary of the variants and their power requirements.

Table 7-5
3916 Power Supply Overview

Model Power System Power Range Breaker

3916 AC Standard and Single AC 100 to 240 VAC, 3 Amp


3916 AC Mini 50/60 Hz, 2 Amps

3916 Dual AC Standard and Dual AC 100 to 240 VAC, 3 Amp


3916 Dual AC Mini 50/60 Hz, 2 Amps

3916 DC Standard Single DC +/- 24/36/48 VDC, 5 Amps (24V or 36V) or


2.0 Amps 2.5 Amps (48V)

Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local
and national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose
and meet the relevant electrical codes.
Note: The minimum 48VDC breaker value assumes that the back-up batteries at your facility are
configured to disconnect at a predefined level if the charging circuit is not restored. If your facility does
not have an automatic battery shutdown level of >20VDC, the recommended breaker value for 48VDC
will result in the breaker being tripped if power is not restored before the batteries exhaust. For
installations without automatic battery disconnect use the minimum recommended 24VDC breaker size.

DC Power
The 3916 is offered in only one chassis size with DC power, the 3916 DC
Standard (170-3916-901). This system includes a single integrated DC power
supply. The DC power supply operates at +/- 24 or +/- 48 VDC, drawing a
maximum of 2 Amps. The connections to the DC mains and ground are made
using a terminal block available on the faceplate of the power supply.

The DC power cord should be 14 AWG - 18 AWG wire. You will also need to
install fork terminal spade lugs on the power cord wires to ensure a proper
connection with the terminal block of the power supply. Table 7-6 on page 7-8
contains a summary of the recommended locking fork terminal lugs.

Table 7-5 on page 7-7 summarizes the minimum fuse values for both 24 V and
48 V input installations.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
7-8 3916 Service Delivery Switch

Table 7-6
3916 DC Lug Summary

Maximum
Wire Size Stud Recommended Lug
Lug Width

14 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6FF-C (16-14 AWG)

14 and 18 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6LF-C (18-14 AWG)

Panduit PV14-6LFW-C (18-14 AWG)

18 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV18-6FF-CY (22-16 AWG)

Panduit PV18-6LF-CY (22-18 AWG)

Panduit PV18-6LFW-CY (22-18 AWG)

Note: Use one of these recommended lugs or a close equivalent. If a ring lug is used, you will need to
remove and reinstall the screw. Take care not to lose the screw during this process.

AC Power
Four 3916 systems with AC power exist as summarized in Table 7-5 on page
7-7. The main differences between systems involve chassis size (standard or
mini) and number of power connections (single or dual). The power
installation procedure for these systems is similar since they all use standard
AC power cords.
All systems have an AC power supply that is a wide-range supply and
supports input voltages between 100 and 240 Volts AC nominal. The breaker
on the power input should be installed as per the National Electrical Code
guidelines, and a 15 Amp breaker maximum.

Note: The use of an external Surge Protective Device (SPD) is required


to meet GR-1089 Type 7 port requirements.

The AC power cord connects to the faceplate of the module using a standard
plug. The faceplate is equipped with a bail lock mechanism to assist with
power cord retention. The bail lock is designed to work with the Ciena power
cords. The bail lock snaps down over the hood of the power cord and prevents
it from becoming accidentally unplugged when the power cord is pulled. To
remove the power cord from the AC power supply you need to remove the bail
lock before tugging on the power cable.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3916 Service Delivery Switch 7-9

Power Redundancy
When the 3916 Dual AC system is installed the power unit is redundant. Both
power supplies provide system power simultaneously. Each input power cable
should be connected to an independent power feed in order to provide
redundant power to the system. If one power feed fails, the remaining power
supply will compensate to maintain uninterrupted system operation.

Note: If you have a 3916 single AC or DC system, there is no power


redundancy.

Power Status LEDs


The 3916 Dual AC system has 2 power status LEDs, one for PS A (left power
outlet) and the other for PS B (right power outlet). The power status LEDs are
located to the right of the power outlets and labeled PS A and PS B. The 3916
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3226-001) provides a more
detailed description of the LED indications.

AC Power Cord
The 3916 single AC device uses one power cord, and the 3916 Dual AC
devices require two power cords. The exact specifications of the cord required
will vary depending on the local power codes. For example, the configuration
of the plug that is attached to the power source will vary for each region
around the world. You need to obtain the correct power cord to meet your local
requirements.

WARNING
All AC power cords must meet the requirements of the local
and national electric codes prior to installation.

Ciena offers the following AC power cables for the 3916:


AC Power Cord, IEC C13, Europe
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, North America
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, United Kingdom
AC Power Cord, C13, Universal

Dying Gasp
The 3916 supports dying gasp functionality. In the event of a power failure, the
3916 sends a dying gasp notification to the network. The notification also
contains a syslog entry (if syslog is enabled).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
7-10 3916 Service Delivery Switch

Environmental Control
The 3916 is designed for deployment in indoor locations and partially
controlled environments and supports the following environmental range:
Operating Temperature Range: 0 C to 50 C (32 F to 122 F)
Storage Temperature Range: -40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F)
Operating Humidity Range: 5% to 90% humidity, non-condensing

Extreme Temperature Conditions


The 3916 has internal temperature sensors that monitor the temperature
within the unit. The software supports alarms, traps and logs at user
configurable temperature thresholds.

Fans and Airflow


The 3916 chassis is equipped with two fans to provide cooling redundancy.

In the standard chassis systems, the fans draw air from the right side of the
unit and exhaust out the left side of the unit. The fan speed increases when
temperatures exceed a preset threshold. When installed, you must ensure
that the air vents on the sides of the unit are not blocked.

In the mini chassis systems, the fans draw air from the front faceplate of the
unit and exhaust air to the rear of the chassis.

When installed, you must ensure that the air vents on the sides of the unit
(standard chassis) or front/rear of the unit (mini chassis) are not blocked.

Fan Failure
If a fan failure occurs, an alarm is raised and an SNMP trap is sent. When a
fan fails in the 3916, fan redundancy ensures that operation is maintained until
the unit can be replaced. Replacing the fans is a service impacting repair
since the unit must be taken completely offline and returned to Ciena for
repair.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3916 Service Delivery Switch 7-11

Grounding
The 3916 is connected to ground at the power supply and the chassis.

Note: The Battery Return lead is considered DC-I (isolated from frame
ground) as described in GR-1089-Core, Issue 6.

Power Supply Grounding


The safety ground connection is provided by the AC power cord or by the
ground terminal on the DC power input connector.

WARNING
The AC version relies on the AC power cord for Safety Ground.
The outlet providing power to the 3916 must meet the Local
and National Safety codes.

WARNING
The DC version relies on the connector at the front of the
power supply to provide Safety Ground. This grounding
connection must be properly attached when the 3916 is
installed.

Supplemental Ground
On standard chassis systems a supplemental ground connection is provided
for connection to a Common Bonding Network (CBN). The supplemental
ground connection is required on 3916 DC Standard installations. The
supplemental ground connection is optional on 3916 AC Standard and 3916
Dual AC Standard installations. Mini chassis systems do not require a
supplemental ground connection.

The grounding screws are located on the left side of the standard chassis. See
Figure 7-4. The ground location will support a 2-hole lug.

Figure 7-4
Side of 3916 Chassis and Grounding Screw Location (Standard chassis)

Grounding Screws

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
7-12 3916 Service Delivery Switch

The grounding screws are provided on the chassis with the system.

The grounding lug and grounding wire are customer supplied. The following
description indicates the required specifications:
#6 AWG (minimum) wire
2 hole lug @ 5/8 centers and with hole size for #10 or 1/4 screw
The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines, and the grounding procedures used by your
company.

The DC resistance between the chassis and the supplemental ground source
should be verified to be less than 100 milliohms.

See 3916 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3226-001) for a


procedure.

Resets
The 3916 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button.

On the standard chassis, the reset button is located below the STAT and ALM
LEDs. On the mini chassis the reset button is located to the left of the Console
port. Figure 7-5 shows the location of the reset button.

Figure 7-5
Location of the 3916 Reset Button

Standard Chassis Mini Chassis

Reset Button Reset Button

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3916 Service Delivery Switch 7-13

There are two different types of resets available:


Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than three seconds. A quick reset reboots the system with the current
saved configuration.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for three
seconds or more continuously. A hard reset erases the current
configuration and restores the unit to the factory default settings. See
Default configuration overview on page 18-1 for more information about
the factory default settings.
Note: It is also possible to initiate soft resets of the system through the
local console port, or the management VLAN. Instructions for initiating a
soft reset are included in the 39XX/51XX Command Reference (009-
3220-010).

Default Configuration
If the 3916 does not have an operational configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
Packet Networking portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview
on page 18-1. See that chapter for additional information.

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 3916 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit and the
interfaces have integrated LEDs which provide status information for the port.

Figure 7-6
Front View of 3916 Chassis (Standard system shown)

Figure 7-7
Front View of 3916 Chassis (Mini system shown)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
7-14 3916 Service Delivery Switch

Figure 7-6 on page 7-13 shows the faceplate of a Standard chassis system,
and Figure 7-7 on page 7-13 shows the faceplate of a Mini chassis system.
The port layout is the same for all systems of the same chassis size.

More detailed LED information is provided in 3916 Hardware Installation and


Start-up Manual (009-3226-001).

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 3916 including:
100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
Console Port (EIA-561)
100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
The 3916 has six 100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports. Ports 1 and 2 are combo
ports, with both an RJ-45 jack and an SFP option available for that port. The
RJ-45/SFP plugs for Ports 1 and 2 are located side-by-side on the left side of
the chassis. The remaining four ports are SFP only and are organized in a
single row on the front left/center of the chassis with Port 3 on the left and Port
6 on the right/center.

The RJ-45 copper ports support 10/100/1000 Mbps operation with auto-
negotiation of speed and duplex as well as auto-MDI/MDIX. These RJ-45
ports are GR-1089 Type 4 ports and are intended for indoor use only. These
ports are fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard. When
connecting to the RJ-45 copper ports Cat 5e shielded cables are
recommended.

Shielded cables are required to meet Class B emissions. Shield Ethernet


cables are required to meet GR-1089 Radiated Immunity, ESD and EN 55024
ESD requirements. Ciena recommends the use of Cat 5e shielded cables.
The shielded cables must be grounded at both ends.

SFP ports 3 and 4 support 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps speeds. The port
characteristics are set by the capabilities of the SFPs that are installed. SFP
ports 5 and 6 support 1000 Mbps speed only. The SFPs ports conform to the
IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet standard.

By default, the SFP ports are active for Ports 1 and 2. You can configure the
system to use the RJ-45 ports for Ports 1 and 2 in the software after the
system becomes active.

Both the RJ-45 and SFP ports also include integrated status LEDs. See 3916
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3226-001) for more
information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3916 Service Delivery Switch 7-15

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported SFPs is


documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).

Console Port (EIA-561)


The 3916 includes one serial port with RJ-45 connector for maintenance
purposes. This port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled
Console.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the Packet
Networking portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1.
See that chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
7-16 3916 Service Delivery Switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
8-1

3920 Service Delivery Switch 8-

Note: The 3920 is not supported by this release. The 3920 uses SAOS
Release 6.10 instead. This product is included in this document so that it
provides a complete summary of the portfolio.

The 3920 is an entry-level, next-generation Gigabit Ethernet SDS for business


demarcation applications and providing basic Ethernet Private Line (EPL),
Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL), and Ethernet-Local Area Network (E-
LAN) services as well as the ability to deploy across a range of office, outside
controlled environment cabinets, and Point of Presence (POP)/Central Office
(CO) scenarios at a competitive price.

Hardware Overview
Table 8-1 provides a quick overview of the interfaces available on the 3920
and Figure 8-1 on page 8-2 provides a view of the front of the 3920. All
Ethernet ports and power connections are located on the front of the device.

Table 8-1
3920 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Ports Description

NNI 4 100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X SFP


Note: When a copper SFP is installed in
ports 9-12 the only supported speed is
1000 Mbps.

UNI 8 10/100/1000BASE-TX

Console 1 DB-9 Console

Management 1 10/100/1000BASE-TX MGMT

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
8-2 3920 Service Delivery Switch

Chassis Size and Weight


Table 8-2 provides a summary of the system dimensions and weight.

Table 8-2
3920 Chassis Size and Weight

Attribute Value (Metric) Value (Imperial)

Width 44.45 cm 17.5 inches

Depth 23.87 cm 9.4 inches

Height 4.45 cm 1.75 inches

Weight 3.6 kg 8 pounds

Note: The chassis of the 3920 is one rack unit (RU) of a standard 19-inch equipment
rack, allowing up to 42 devices to share a single rack.

Figure 8-1
Front of the 3920
Local Management Port

Console Port
Unit Status LEDs

Reset Button 10/100/1000M 100/1000M

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3920 Service Delivery Switch 8-3

Mounting
The 3920 has the following mounting options:
Desktop
Wall Mount
Rack Install
Desktop
The 3920 has rubber feet and can be installed on a desktop.

Wall Mount
The wallmount bracket is attached to the sides of an unpowered/unconnected
chassis and used to hang the unit onto the wall. Units may be oriented for
either left or right access. The wall mount bracket does not contain any cable
management features.

Rack Install
The frame mount bracket is attached to the sides of an unpowered/
unconnected chassis and used to position the unit in a frame. Two frame
mount bracket kits are available one for 19 frames and another for 23
frames. Use the bracket size that suits your installation.

The bracket kits also include cable supports. The cable supports are installed
on the mounting brackets and are used to keep the cables out of adjacent
equipment space by directing them along the faceplate of the unit.

Full mounting instructions are provided in 3920 Hardware Installation and


Start-up Manual (009-3229-001).

Power
The 3920 is available as an AC or DC powered device. The power connection
for the AC or DC system is made on the left of the front faceplate of the
chassis. See Figure 8-1 on page 8-2. The power supply is integrated in the
unit and must be selected when ordering the device. Table 8-3 on page 8-4
provides a summary.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
8-4 3920 Service Delivery Switch

Table 8-3
3920 System Power Overview

Module Part Number Power Range Power Breaker


Consumption

AC powered system 170-3920-900 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 55 W (maximum) 6 Amp
1.0 to 0.75 Amps

DC powered system 170-3920-901 24V DC to 60V DC, 36 W (maximum) 6 Amp


1.5 Amps

Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local
and national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose
and meet the relevant electrical codes.

Environmental Control
The 3920 is designed for deployment in indoor temperature controlled
locations. Table 8-4 provides a summary of the operating environment.

Table 8-4
3920 Operating Environment

Attribute Value (Metric) Value (Imperial)

Operating Temperature Range 0 C to +50 C 32 F to 122 F

Storage Temperature Range -40 C to +70 C -40 F to 158 F

Operating Humidity Range 5 % to 90 % non-condensing

Fans
The 3920 houses two fans to provide a cooling air flow across the internal
components. Only one fan is required for normal operation, however, if a fan
fails, an alarm/SNMP trap is generated so that the unit can be replaced in the
next maintenance window.

To ensure that the fan assembly can provide adequate cooling, always
provide a minimum of 3 inches (8 cm) of clearance on the front and back of
the chassis.

Fan Failure
When a fan fails, the 3920 should be replaced. This is a service impacting
repair since the unit must be taken completely offline and returned to Ciena
for repair. Fans are not customer serviceable. The unit should not be operated
for more than 15 minutes without a functional fan. This is for a system that is
at the maximum operating temperature (ambient +65C).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3920 Service Delivery Switch 8-5

Grounding
The ground connection is different for AC and DC 3920 systems.

For 3920 AC systems, a safety ground connection is provided by the AC


power cord. The system does not have a separate supplemental ground
connection.

WARNING
The 3920 relies on the AC power cord for Safety ground. The
outlet providing power to the 3920 must meet the Local and
National Safety codes.

For 3920 DC systems, there is a frame ground connection on the front


chassis, just below the DC power connections. See Figure 8-2 on page 8-5.
The ground connection is created using the following Customer supplied
components:

To ground unit use a Green colored conductor and the following UL listed
two hole lug or equivalent: Thomas and Betts part number 256-31426-9.
Minimum: One 12 AWG stranded wire or 14 AWG solid wire.
Use the included two 10-32 x " Phillips screws to secure the ground lug
to the chassis using 8 inch-lbs of torque to tighten the ground screws.
Figure 8-2
Location of Ground Lug (3920 DC only)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
8-6 3920 Service Delivery Switch

Resets
The 3920 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is unlabeled
and is located between to the left of the Unit Status LEDs. Figure 8-1 on page
8-2 shows the location of the reset button.

Under normal operation, the reset button should not be used. However, if the
device will not boot properly and the Status LED is off or continues blinking, a
manual system reset can be performed as a last resort.

There are multiple types of reset available, each triggered by depressing the
reset button for different lengths of time as follows:
Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than 2 seconds. A quick reset reboots the system with the current saved
configuration.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for three
seconds or more continuously. A hard reset erases the current
configuration and restores the unit to factory default settings. See Default
configuration overview on page 18-1 for more information about the
factory default settings.
Board-level reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button
for more than 10 seconds continuously. The board-level reset should only
be used if the device does not respond to either of the other two options.
Default Configuration
If the device does not have an operation configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
CES portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview on page 18-1.
See that chapter for additional information.

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 3920 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit and the
interfaces have integrated LEDs which provide status information for the port.
LED descriptions for all ports are provided in 3920 Hardware Installation and
Start-up Manual (009-3229-001).

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 3920 including:
100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
Local Management Port
Console Port

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3920 Service Delivery Switch 8-7

All uplink ports can be active at a single time. One 10/100 Mbps port is
included for local management.

CAUTION
Subscriber ports on the 3920 are intended for interconnection
within the providers network only. However, connection to
multiple providers networks (or the PSTN) can be achieved
using other solutions that are available within the Ciena
Corporation family of products.

100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports


The 3920 provides four 100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X Ethernet ports. These
ports can be used as NNI or UNI connections. These ports use small form
factor, pluggable (SFP) optics, operate only in full duplex mode, and conform
to the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standards. The document Packet Networking
Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602) lists the SFPs supported for this
product. The SFPs are hot-swappable, allowing compliant optics to be
plugged in to change the external interface of the port, thus providing a mix of
possible distances and media types.

Note: When a copper SFP is installed in ports 9-12 the only supported
speed is 1000 Mbps.

10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports


The 3920 includes eight 10/100/1000BASE-TX, autonegotiating, auto MDIX
ports for connecting subscriber devices and other downstream equipment.
These UNI ports use RJ-45 connectors and are fully compliant with the IEEE
802.3 Ethernet standards.

Local Management Port


One 10/100/1000BASE-T, autonegotiating, auto MDIX port (labeled as
MGMT) is provided for out-of-band management. This port uses an RJ-45
connector and is fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standards. The
management port can be used to attach a PC directly to the device or it can
be connected to the network for management. This port also includes
integrated status LEDs.

Console Port
The 3920 also includes an external serial console port for EIA-232
communication on the front of the device labeled EIA-232 Console. The
console port can be used to attach a terminal or a PC to the device for out-of-
band management.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the CES
portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1. See that
chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
8-8 3920 Service Delivery Switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
9-1

3930 Service Delivery Switch 9-

The 3930 is a high capacity 28 Gbps Carrier Ethernet Service Delivery Switch.
Multiple variants of the 3930 are available. Table 9-1 provides a summary.
Table 9-1
Summary of Available 3930 Systems

Description Type of 3930 Chassis

Standard Sync Sync + External


(170-3930-900) (170-3930-910) Timing
(170-3930-930)

2 x 1/10 GbE SFP/SFP+ ports X X X

4 x 10/100/1000M combo RJ-45/SFP ports X X X

4 x 100/1000M SFP ports X X X

2 slots for AC or DC power supplies X X X

1 RU form factor X X X

Synchronous Ethernet Not Supported X X

IEEE1588v2 clock Not Supported X X

Stratum 3E holdover clock Not Supported X X

External timing interfaces: Not Supported Not Supported


BITS X
1 PPS signal X
10 MHz signal X

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
9-2 3930 Service Delivery Switch

An overview of the chassis is provided in the following figures. Figure 9-1


shows a 3930 Standard system. The 3930 Standard and 3930 Sync systems
have the same faceplate and port configuration. Figure 9-2 shows a 3930
Synchronization capable with External timing interfaces (Sync + External
Timing) system.

Figure 9-1
Front view of the 3930 (3930 Standard or 3930 Sync system shown)

100/1000 Mbps Ports Power Modules


1/10 Gbps Ports Console
Alarms MGMT

Figure 9-2
Front view of the 3930 (3930 Sync + External Timing system shown)

100/1000 Mbps Ports Power Modules


1/10 Gbps Ports MGMT
Console
SYNC Alarms
10MHz 1PPS

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3930 Service Delivery Switch 9-3

Hardware Overview
The product is designed so that all the user and management interfaces are
located on the front of the chassis. Table 9-2 provides a quick overview of the
interfaces available on the 3930 and Figure 9-1 on page 9-2 provides a view
of the front of the 3930.

Table 9-2
3930 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Description


Ports

NNI/UNI 2 1/10 Gigabit Ethernet ports with SFP/SFP+ connectors. These are ports
9 and 10.
The SFP+ connectors also support the use of 1G SFP optics.
Copper SFPs installed in these ports support 1000 Mbps only.

NNI/UNI 4 100/1000 Mbps ports with SFP connectors. These are ports 5 to 8.
Port speeds as follows:
Fiber SFPs support both 100 and 1000 Mbps
Copper SFPs support 10, 100 and 1000 Mbps

NNI/UNI 4 Combo RJ-45/SFP ports. These are ports 1 to 4. Port speeds as follows:
Fiber SFPs support both 100 and 1000 Mbps
Copper SFPs support 1000 Mbps
RJ-45 support 10, 100 and 1000 Mbps
The combo ports have both a copper and an optical version of the same
port. Both ports can be cabled, however only one of the pair of copper/optic
ports will be active at any time. The combo ports are controlled through the
software.

Management 1 10/100 Mbps copper port (RJ-45) for out-of-band management

Console 1 Serial EIA-561 (RJ-45) port

Sync 1 BITS-In or BITS-Out, 1PPS and Time of Day (future).


Note: Available on 3930 Sync + External Timing systems only.

1 PPS 1 1 PPS external synchronization port and Time of Day (future).


Note: Available on 3930 Sync + External Timing systems only.

10 MHz 1 10 MHz external synchronization port.


Note: Available on 3930 Sync + External Timing systems only.

Alarm 1 26-pin D-sub plug with custom pin-out

Note: Only Ciena approved optics can be used with the 3930. The SFP/SFP+ summary and orderable
part numbers are contained in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).
Note: For additional information about the external timing ports see External timing on page 20-1.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
9-4 3930 Service Delivery Switch

Chassis Size and Weight


The chassis of the 3930 occupies 1 rack unit (RU) of a standard 19-inch
equipment frame, allowing up to 42 devices in a single frame. The chassis has
the following dimensions:
Width: 44.4 cm (17.5 inches)
Depth: 25.4 cm (10 inches)
Height: 4.4 cm (1.75 inches)

The chassis is designed so that the power cabling and all interface cabling is
located on the faceplate of the chassis. The grounding cable is installed on the
rear of the chassis. For more information see Grounding on page 9-10.

Additional Clearances
To provide sufficient clearance for cabling and airflow, Ciena recommends the
following clearances:
Rear of chassis: 6.4 cm (2.5 inches)
Front of chassis: 7.6 cm (3 inches)

Note: The 3930 also draws air through intake vents on the right side of
the chassis. When the unit is installed you should ensure that this area is
not obstructed by cables running along the side of the frame.

System Weight
Before you start, ensure that the frame or mounting surface (wallmount
installations) is capable of supporting the weight of the system. Table 9-3
provides a list of the components that can be used in a system and their
weight.

Table 9-3
3930 Component Weight Summary

Component Weight (lbs) Weight (kg)

3930 without power supplies 7.5 3.43

AC power supply (up to 2 of these are used) 1.69 0.77

DC power supply (up to 2 of these are used) 1.8 0.82

3930 with 2 AC power supplies 10.95 4.97

3930 with 2 DC power supplies 11.0 5.01

Note: There will also be a small amount of incremental weight for SFPs and cabling.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3930 Service Delivery Switch 9-5

Mounting
The following mounting brackets are available:
19-inch frame (this bracket is part of the 3930 kit)
23-inch frame
Wall Mount

The brackets are attached to the chassis using 3 (wallmount bracket) or 4


(frame mount brackets) screw holes.

The frame mount brackets are also compatible with cable support brackets
that are designed to keep cables out of adjacent equipment space. See 3930
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3223-001) for more
information.

The wallmount bracket allows the chassis to be mounted on a wall. The


wallmount bracket does not contain any cable management features. See
3930 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3223-001) for more
information.

Note: For installations using the wallmount bracket, the hardware


required to attach the mounting bracket to the wall is Customer supplied.
In addition, the reinforced mounting surface should be capable of
supporting approximately 100 pounds. Ensure that the hardware used
includes the proper fasteners/anchors required to support the weight of
the unit.

Power Options
The 3930 has redundant power supplies which are accessed from the front of
the chassis. Both AC and DC power supplies are available. The system is also
capable of operation with a single power supply, however redundant power
supplies are recommended. When a single power supply is used, the empty
power supply bay must be covered with a filler plate. A filler plate is provided
with the base system.

Because the power unit is redundant, the power supplies are hot swappable
and field replaceable. With both power supplies installed, the power supplies
provide system power simultaneously (load sharing). During power supply
replacement, the remaining power supply will compensate to maintain
uninterrupted system operation. If one of the power supply units fails, it should
be replaced as soon as possible.

Note: The 3930, 3932 and 5142 all use the same power supplies.

Table 9-4 on page 9-6 provides a summary of the available power options.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
9-6 3930 Service Delivery Switch

Table 9-4
3930 Power Supply Overview

Module Part Number Power Range Breaker

AC power supply 170-0014-900 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 Amp


1.0 to 0.5 Amps

DC power supply 170-0013-900 20V DC to 60V DC, 5 Amps (24V or 36V)


4.0 Amps or 2.5 Amps (48V)

Note: When two power supplies are installed, use power supplies of the same type. Do not combine
AC and DC power supplies in the same installation. This is an untested configuration and is not
supported.
Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local and
national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose and
meet the relevant electrical codes.
Note: The minimum 48VDC breaker value assumes that the back-up batteries at your facility are
configured to disconnect at a predefined level if the charging circuit is not restored. If your facility does
not have an automatic battery shutdown level of >20VDC, the recommended breaker value for 48VDC
will result in the breaker being tripped if power is not restored before the batteries exhaust. For
installations without automatic battery disconnect use the minimum recommended 24VDC breaker size.

DC Power Supply
The DC power supply module is a wide range DC power module and accepts
a range of input voltages (see Table 9-4) including -/+48 V DC, -/+36 V DC or
-/+24 V DC.

The connections to the DC mains and ground are made using a terminal block
available on the faceplate of each power supply.

The DC power cord should be a 14 AWG - 18 AWG wire. You will also need
to install fork terminal spade lugs on the power cord wires to ensure a proper
connection with the terminal block of the power supply. Table 9-5 on page 9-7
contains a summary of the recommended locking fork terminal lugs.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3930 Service Delivery Switch 9-7

Table 9-5
3930 DC Lug Summary

Wire Size Stud Maximum Lug Width Recommended Lug

14 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6FF-C (16-14 AWG)

14 and 18 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6LF-C (18-14 AWG)

Panduit PV14-6LFW-C (18-14 AWG)

18 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV18-6FF-CY (22-16 AWG)

Panduit PV18-6LF-CY (22-18 AWG)

Panduit PV18-6LFW-CY (22-18 AWG)

Note: Use one of these recommended lugs or a close equivalent. If a ring lug is used, you will need to
remove and reinstall the screw. Take care not to lose the screw during this process.

Table 9-4 on page 9-6 summarizes the minimum breaker values for 24 V, 36 V
and 48 V input installations.

In order to successfully replace the power supply while the unit is operating,
the DC power supplies must be powered off separate breakers. This allows
you to turn off power feeding the power supply that is being replaced. While
the second independent circuit remains on, and powers the unit during the
replacement process. As a result, Ciena recommends that each DC power
supply be connected to a separate breaker.

AC Power Supply
The AC power supply module is a wide range AC power module and accepts
input voltages of 100 V to 240 V AC nominal. The AC power cord connects to
the faceplate of the module using a standard plug.

WARNING

As per GR-1089 Section 4.12 an external Surge Protective


Device (SPD) is required at the AC input of the 3930.

The faceplate is equipped with a bail lock mechanism to assist with power
cord retention. The bail lock snaps over the hood of the power cord and
prevents it from becoming accidentally unplugged when the power cord is
pulled. To remove the power cord from the AC power supply you need to
remove the bail lock before tugging on the power cable.

For each 3930 device with redundant power supplies you will need two power
cords. The exact specifications of the cord required will vary depending on:
AC or DC power supply

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
9-8 3930 Service Delivery Switch

local power codes for example, the configuration of the plug that is
attached to the power source will vary for each region around the world.
You need to obtain the correct power cord to meet your local
requirements.

WARNING

All AC power cords must meet the requirements of the local


and national electric codes prior to installation.

Ciena offers the following AC power cables for the 3930:


AC Power Cord, IEC C13, Europe
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, North America
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, United Kingdom
AC Power Cord, C13, Universal

Power Status LEDs


The status of the power supplies is visible on the faceplate of the 3930 through
the INPUT and OUTPUT LEDs on each power supply. See the 3930
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3223-001) for a detailed
description of the LED indications.

Power Supply Failure


If a problem occurs with the power supply, an alarm is raised and an SNMP
trap is sent. If the power supply has been disabled, an LED indication will also
occur showing the defective power supply is off.

After a problem has been identified, the power supply should be replaced. See
3930 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3223-001) for the
procedures to remove a power supply and install a new unit.

Dying Gasp
The 3930 supports dying gasp functionality. In the event of a power failure, the
3930 sends a dying gasp notification to the network. The notification also
contains a syslog entry (if syslog is enabled).

Note: When the system is powered by redundant power supplies, a dying


gasp message will only be sent if both power supplies lose power.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3930 Service Delivery Switch 9-9

Environmental Control
The 3930 is designed for deployment in Outdoor Street Cabinets, huts and
other unconditioned locations and supports the following environmental
range:
-40C to +65C (-40F to 149F) operating ambient temperature up to an
altitude of 4000 m
-40C to +70C storage temperature
5% to 95% non-condensing humidity

Extreme Temperature Conditions


The 3930 has internal temperature sensors that monitor the temperature
within the unit. The software supports alarms, traps and logs at user
configurable temperature thresholds.

When temperatures exceed the maximum operating temperature, an


automatic over temperature shutdown is initiated to protect the 3930 from
damage. The thermal switch continues to monitor the temperature, and when
the temperature returns to the supported operating temperature range, the
unit will automatically restart and resume service.

Fans and Airflow


The 3930 chassis is equipped with three fans to provide adequate airflow. The
fans draw air from the front and right side of the unit, and exhaust out the rear.
The 7.6 cm (3 inch) installation clearance at the front and 6.4 cm (2.5 inch)
clearance at the back of the unit assists with air flow by ensuring that the vents
of the unit are not blocked. You should also ensure that the air vents on the
right side of the chassis are not obstructed by cables running along the side
of the frame.

When only one power supply is installed in the 3930, the second power supply
bay must be covered with a filler plate. The filler plate is necessary to ensure
proper airflow within the 3930. The unit is initially supplied with a filler plate. If
it is misplaced, a replacement can be ordered from Ciena.

Fan Failure
If a fan failure occurs, an alarm is raised and an SNMP trap is sent. When a
single fan fails in the 3930 the platform continues to function normally and
meet all specifications. However, the unit should be scheduled for servicing by
Ciena. Replacing the fans is a service impacting repair since the unit must be
taken completely offline and returned to Ciena for repair. If a unit is returned
for a fan failure, all three fans in the system are replaced by Ciena.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
9-10 3930 Service Delivery Switch

Grounding
The 3930 is connected to ground at the power supplies and the chassis.

Note: The Battery Return lead is considered DC-I (isolated from frame
ground) as described in GR-1089-Core, Issue 5.

Power Supply Grounding


The safety ground connection is provided by the AC power cord or by the
grounding terminal on the DC power supply. Further details are provided in
3930 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3223-001).

WARNING

The AC version relies on the AC power cord for Safety ground.


The outlet providing power to the 3930 must meet the Local
and National Safety codes.

WARNING

The DC version relies on the connector at the front of the


power supply to provide Safety Ground. This grounding
connection must be properly attached when the 3930 is
installed.

Supplemental Ground
A supplemental ground location is provided on the back of the chassis. This
ground location will support a 2-hole lug.

The grounding screws are provided and are located on the rear of the chassis
in the center. See Figure 9-3 on page 9-11 for the location of the grounding
screws.

The grounding lug and grounding wire are customer supplied. The following
description indicates the required specifications:
#6 AWG (minimum) wire
2 hole lug @ 5/8 centers and with hole size for #10 or 1/4 screw

The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines, and the grounding procedures used by your
company.

The DC resistance between the chassis and the supplemental ground source
should be verified to be less than 100 milliohms.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3930 Service Delivery Switch 9-11

Figure 9-3
Rear of the 3930 Chassis and Rear Grounding Screw Location

Resets
It is possible to initiate soft resets of the system through the local console port,
local management port, or the management VLAN. Instructions for initiating a
soft reset are included in the 39XX/51XX Command Reference (009-3220-
010). This is the recommended way to reset the system.

The 3930 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is located to the
left of the management port on the far right of the chassis. Figure 9-4 and
Figure 9-5 on page 9-12 show the location of the reset button.

Figure 9-4
Location of the 3930 Reset Button (3930 Standard and 3930 Sync systems)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
9-12 3930 Service Delivery Switch

Figure 9-5
Location of the 3930 Reset Button (3930 Sync + External Timing system)

Reset Button

There are two different types of resets available:


Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than three seconds. A quick reset reboots the system with the current
saved configuration. When you press the reset button for less than 3
seconds, all the LEDs on the faceplate will be lit.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for three
seconds or more continuously. When you press the reset button for more
than 3 seconds, all the LEDs on the faceplate will be lit, then they will flash
to indicate that the hard reset has been initiated. A hard reset erases the
current configuration and restores the unit to the factory default settings.
See Default configuration overview on page 18-1 for more information
about the factory default settings.

Note 1: The 3930 Sync + External Timing systems have additional


behavior that occurs when the reset button is pushed and the system is
unresponsive. If you are using a 3930 Sync + External Timing unit you
should also read the section Creating a State Dump or Core Dump Log
File on page 9-13
Note 2: Pressing the reset button will also result in an LED indication. The
LED behavior is described in 3930 Hardware Installation and Start-up
Manual (009-3223-001).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3930 Service Delivery Switch 9-13

Creating a State Dump or Core Dump Log File


Note: The functionality described in this section is only available on 3930
Sync + External Timing systems. This feature is not supported on 3930
Standard and 3930 Sync systems.

Two types of log files are available:


State dump log The state dump provides a summary of the current and
previous state of the system.
Core dump log The core dump provides a summary of the processes
that were running when the system became unresponsive.

The creation of these files is triggered by depressing the reset button (for
either a quick or hard reset) on 3930 Sync + External Timing systems.

The log file creation varies depending on the state of the system when the
reset button is depressed. One of the following scenarios will occur:
System was responsive when the reset button was depressed The
state dump file is generated before the system reboots. There will be
minimal delay (approximately 5 seconds) while the state dump file is
created and stored to the system memory. After the state dump file is
created the system will reboot.
System was unresponsive when the reset button was depressed
In this case a full core dump will be initiated, and then a state dump. There
will be a delay (up to 2 minutes) while the core dump file is created and
stored to system memory. Next the state dump file is created and stored
to system memory. After the both the core dump and state dump files are
created the system will reboot.

When the system reboots, you will be able to retrieve the state dump file and
core dump file (if it exists) from the system. The log files are stored in the
following locations:
State dump log files: /mnt/sysfs/log/push_button_state-dump
Note: If a state dump file already exists on the system, it will be renamed
push_button_state-dump.prev when the new file is created.

Core dump log files: /tmp/corefiles/

These files can be used to assist with troubleshooting the system.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
9-14 3930 Service Delivery Switch

Default Configuration
If the 3930 does not have an operational configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
Packet Networking portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview
on page 18-1. See that chapter for additional information.

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 3930 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit. With
the exception of the Console port and Alarm port, all the interfaces have
integrated LEDs which provide status information for the port. Figure 9-1 on
page 9-2 and Figure 9-2 on page 9-2 show the faceplate of the unit and
identifies the locations of the different ports.

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 3930 including:
10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
Local Management Port (10/100)
Sync Port
1 PPS
10 MHz
Console Port (EIA-561)
External Alarm Inputs

Note: Not all ports are available on all 3930 systems. See Table 9-1 on
page 9-1 and Table 9-2 on page 9-3 for more information.

10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports


The faceplate of the 3930 has two high-capacity ports labelled Port 9 and Port
10. These ports can be configured as either NNI or UNI ports and support both
SFP and SFP+ modules.

These ports are capable of operating at 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps (SFP+) speeds.


The port characteristics are set by the capabilities of the SFPs that are
installed. The SFP ports conform to the IEEE 802.3ae 10-Gigabit Ethernet
standard and are hot-swappable.

The SFP+ connectors also support the use of 1G SFP optics. A copper SFP
installed in these ports support 1000 Mbps only.

These ports also include integrated status LEDs. See 3930 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3223-001) for more information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3930 Service Delivery Switch 9-15

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported SFP/SFP+ optics
is documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-
602). When the 3930 is installed in an outdoor application, extended
temperature optics are required.

10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports


The 3930 has eight 1 Gbps Ethernet ports. Ports 1 to 4 are combo ports, with
both an RJ-45 jack and an SFP option available for that port. The SFP ports
are organized in a single row on the front left/center of the chassis with Port 1
on the left and Port 8 on the right/center.

The RJ-45 copper ports support 10/100/1000 Mbps operation with auto-
negotiation of speed and duplex as well as auto-MDI/MDIX. These RJ-45
ports are GR-1089 Type 4 ports and are intended for indoor use only. These
ports are fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard and
IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-T standard. When connecting to the RJ-45 copper
ports Cat 5 UTP cables are recommended.

The SFP ports support the following speeds:


Fiber SFPs in ports 1-8 support both 100 and 1000 Mbps
Copper SFPs in ports 1-4 support 1000 Mbps
Copper SFPs in ports 5-8 support 10, 100, and 1000 Mbps
The port characteristics are set by the capabilities of the SFPs that are
installed. The SFPs ports conform to the IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet
standard.

For the combo ports which support both RJ-45 and SFPs, if both the SFP and
the RJ-45 are cabled, the system will default to using the SFP port. You can
modify this default in the software after the system becomes active.

Both the RJ-45 and SFP ports also include integrated status LEDs. See 3930
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3223-001) for more
information.

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported SFPs is


documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).
When the 3930 is installed in an outdoor application, extended temperature
SFPs are required.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
9-16 3930 Service Delivery Switch

Local Management Port (10/100)


The 3930 includes one 10/100 Mbps port for out-of-band management. This
port is located on the right of the faceplate and is labeled MGMT 10/100. This
port uses an RJ-45 connector and is fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3u
1000Base-Tx Ethernet standard.

Ciena requires the use of a Cat 5 STP cable or better for the Management
port. The cable shield must be terminated at both ends. This port is classified
as intra-building only.

The management port can be used to attach a PC directly to the device, or it


can be connected to the network for management. The management port
uses auto-MDI/MDIX. A straight through (MDI) or a crossover cable (MDIX)
can be connected to this port. Connection speed and duplex are negotiated
with auto-negotiation.

This port also includes integrated status LEDs. See 3930 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3223-001) for more information.

Sync Port
Note: This port is available on 3930 Sync + External Timing systems only.

The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled SYNC.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See Sync port on
page 20-3 for more information about this port.

1 PPS
Note: This port is available on 3930 Sync + External Timing systems only.

The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled 1 PPS.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See 1 PPS on page
20-6 for more information about this port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3930 Service Delivery Switch 9-17

10 MHz
Note: This port is available on 3930 Sync + External Timing systems only.

The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled 10 MHz.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See 10 MHz on page
20-7 for more information about this port.

Console Port (EIA-561)


The 3930 includes one serial port with RJ-45 connector for maintenance
purposes. This port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled
Console. The two LEDs present on the connector are unused.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the Packet
Networking portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1.
See that chapter for additional information.

External Alarm Inputs


The 3930 supports 16 external alarm inputs. The alarm connector is located
in the center/right section of the 3930 labeled ALARMS.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the Alarms chapter. See Alarm Custom Pin-out
(26-pin D-sub connector) on page 19-5 for more information about this port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
9-18 3930 Service Delivery Switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-1

3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-

Cienas 3931 is a weatherproof advanced Carrier Ethernet system able to


deliver Carrier Ethernet services to virtually any location without sacrificing
leading-edge functionality. The 3931 incorporates a complete OAM suite with
built-in RFC 2544 to support the network and service performance monitoring
requirements of large-scale Ethernet deployments while reducing network
operating costs.

The 3931 SDS is a next-generation high-capacity 28 Gigabit Ethernet SDS.


The unit has its own environmentally hardened enclosure and is designed for
outside plant installations. It meets the specification GR-3108 class 4. The
Inside of the enclosure is divided into two parts, allowing Service Provider craft
and customer access to be segregated.

Two variants of 3931 electronics are available, the 3931 Standard (170-3931-
900) and the 3931 Sync (170-3931-910). Both versions have the same
physical form factor. The difference between the two variants of the 3931 is
that the 3931 Sync supports Synchronous Ethernet, IEEE1588v2 clock and
Stratum 3E holdover clock. The 3931 Standard does not have the hardware
or software to support these advanced features related to timing.

Hardware Overview
The 3931 (Ciena part number 120-3931-900) is a high capacity 28 Gigabit
Ethernet SDS. Both AC and DC power options are available. The redundant
power supplies are hot swappable and field replaceable.

Table 10-1 on page 10-2 provides an overview of the components in a 3931.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-2 3931 Service Delivery Switch

Table 10-1
3931 System Component Summary

Component Notes

3931 Enclosure 3931 environmentally hardened enclosure comes empty. The electronics
module must be ordered separately. For more information see 3931
Enclosure on page 10-4.

Electronics Module Two variants are available:


3931 Standard system
3931 Sync system supports Sync-E, 1588 and Stratum 3E holdover
clock.
For more information see Electronics Module on page 10-8.

Fiber Demarcation Kit An SC/SC fiber adapter and jumper cable. Used to provide an interface
(Optional) between the customer accessible space and the optical UNI SFP ports in the
Telco Section. Each set cables a single UNI port only. Up to 4 kits can be used
per system.
For more information see Fiber Demarcation Kit (Optional) on page 10-9.

Power Module Multiple options:


Hardened DC
Hardened AC
For more information see Power Options on page 10-10.

Mounting kits Multiple options:


Wall mount
Pole mount kit (works for both round poles and square posts)
Pole mount band clamps
H-Frame mount
For more information see Mounting on page 10-6.

Figure 10-1 on page 10-3 shows the interior of the enclosure which is divided
into 2 sections:
the Telco Section (left/top), which is usually covered by the Telco door,
houses critical system components (fiber management tray, power
connections, etc.).
the Customer Section (lower right), provides customer access to the
Ethernet ports. The visual port and system status LEDs are also located
in this section.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-3

Figure 10-1
Interior of the 3931 with Components Installed

Telco Section

Customer Section

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-4 3931 Service Delivery Switch

3931 Enclosure
The 3931 is housed in an environmentally hardened enclosure suitable for
exterior mounting. These attributes provide an important savings in cost by
facilitating service provider access and eliminating the requirement for a
protected or conditioned operating environment. For outdoor applications,
weather tight conduit needs to be fitted to the enclosure to prevent moisture
from entering the enclosure.

Figure 10-2 shows the front and 3/4 views of the enclosure. In the 3/4 view
you can see the openings available on the bottom of the enclosure. The
dimensions of the system are provided in 3931 Hardware Installation and
Start-up Manual (009-3225-001).

Figure 10-2
3931 Top and Isometric Views

Cable Entry Ports


The 3931 enclosure has 5 openings at the bottom of the enclosure. Four of
these openings come with pre-installed rubber grommets. The fifth opening,
located in the center, is the cable gland and is for the ground cable. See
Grounding on page 10-13 for more information.

For indoor applications, you can cut an opening in the grommet to allow wires
and cables to pass into the enclosure. You can use a utility knife to cut an
opening in the grommet while it is installed in the 3931 enclosure. Figure 10-3
on page 10-5 shows a grommet.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-5

Figure 10-3
Rubber Grommet

For outdoor applications, weather tight conduit needs to be fitted to the


enclosure to prevent moisture from entering the enclosure. All rubber
grommets need to be removed and replaced with conduit or a plug. The holes
on the chassis are sized to accept 1 1/4 conduit adapters (rigid or flexible).

Chassis Size and Weight


The size of the 3931 enclosure and attached mounting bracket are
summarized in Table 10-2.

Table 10-2
3931 Dimension Summary

Dimension Size (inches) Size (cm)

Width 16.8 42.67

Height 17 43.18

Depth 7 17.78

Door clearance 17.5 44.45

Note: The chassis should be mounted a minimum of 2 feet 6


inches (76.2 cm) above grade.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-6 3931 Service Delivery Switch

Before you start, ensure that the mounting surface is capable of supporting
the weight of the system. Table 10-3 provides a list of the components that
can be used in a system and their weight.

Table 10-3
3931 Component Weight Summary

Component Weight (lbs) Weight (kg)

3931 empty enclosure 21.9 9.94

Electronics module 4.6 2.1

AC Power supply (up to 2 of these are used) 1.1 0.51

DC Power supply (up to 2 of these are used) 1.0 0.46

3931 with electronics module, 2 AC power supplies 28.7 13.05

3931 with electronics module, 2 DC power supplies 28.5 12.96

Note: There will also be a small amount of incremental weight for SFPs/SFP+s and
cabling.

Mounting
The 3931 enclosure uses a single large plate as a mounting bracket. The
mounting bracket is included as part of the 3931 enclosure, and comes pre-
installed on the enclosure. Figure 10-4 on page 10-6 shows the bottom of the
enclosure with the mounting bracket installed.

Figure 10-4
3931 Chassis Bottom with Mounting Bracket

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-7

This bracket has multiple mounting points and is suitable for direct mount to
an H-frame or wall. Alternatively you can use the optional H-Frame or Pole
Mount kits to mount the system.

The mounting bracket also acts as a heat shield and protects the enclosure
from additional heat due to solar loading from the rear.

Mounting Kits
When you are selecting a site for mounting a system you must ensure that it
is capable of supporting the weight of the unit. The system must be mounted
at least 2 feet 6 inches (76.2 cm) above grade. See 3931 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3225-001) for more information.

There are a number of mounting options for the 3931. Table 10-3 contains a
summary.

Table 10-4
3931 Mounting Kit Summary

Mounting Location Item Description Not Included

Wall Mount Uses bracket provided with the 3931 Wall mount screws (Four #12
screws)

Pole Mount Mounting kit for 8 to 20 diameter poles Band clamps (Ciena offers a band
or 6x6 square posts. Includes: clamp kit, poles larger than 12
1 x Top Support Bracket require 2 kits) for mounting to
concrete or steel poles
1 x Vertical Support Structure
Wood screws for mounting to round
2 x Horizontal Supports wood poles
Screws for mounting 3931 and Lag bolts (2 screws, 1/4 x 3 wood
assembling the above parts lag screws) used for square post
mount only

H-Frame Mount Mount kit for generic H-Frame. Includes: Bolts for mounting to H-Frame
(see note below) 1 x Horizontal Support Bracket
2 x Vertical Bracket
Screws for mounting 3931

Note: The 3931 can mount to an existing H-Frame without using the H-Frame Mount kit. To mount to
an existing H-Frame you need two available horizontal beams with a spacing of 9 (minimum) to 13
(maximum). The preferred center to center spacing is 10.5.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-8 3931 Service Delivery Switch

Electronics Module
The electronics module is installed inside the 3931 enclosure as part of the
system installation. There are two different electronics modules available:
3931 Standard (170-3931-900)
3931 Sync (170-3931-910)
The two variants have the same physical form factor. The difference between
the two variants of the 3931 is that the 3931 Sync supports Synchronous
Ethernet, IEEE1588v2 clock and Stratum 3E holdover clock. The 3931
Standard does not have the hardware or software to support these advanced
features related to timing.

All the ports in the system are located on the electronics module. Table 10-5
provides a quick overview of the interfaces available on the 3931 and Figure
10-1 on page 10-3 provides a view of the interior of the 3931.

Table 10-5
3931 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Description


Ports

NNI/UNI 2 1/10 Gigabit Ethernet ports with SFP+ connectors. These are ports 9 and
10.
The SFP+ connectors also support the use of 1G SFP optics.

NNI/UNI 4 100/1000 Mbps ports with SFP connectors. The SFPs support both 100
Mbps and 1000 Mbps speeds. These are ports 1 to 4. These ports also
require the installation of SFPs and the Fiber Demarcation Kit be used. See
Fiber Demarcation Kit (Optional) on page 10-9 for more information.

NNI/UNI 4 10/100/1000 Mbps ports with copper connectors (RJ-45). These are ports
5 to 8.
To meet GR-1089-Core requirements shielded Cat 5 or better cables are
required. Ensure that both ends of the shielded cable are properly
grounded.

Console 1 Serial EIA-561 (RJ-45) port

Alarm 1 Custom alarm cable with no connector. A screw-down terminal-block type


connector is used to secure the bare wires of the alarm cable to the 3931.

Note: Only Ciena approved SFPs can be used with the 3930. The SFP summary and orderable part
numbers are contained in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-9

Fiber Demarcation Kit (Optional)


The Fiber Demarcation Kit is an optional component that is used when SFPs
are present. The Fiber Demarcation Kit is used to create a connection
between the UNI SFP ports in the Telco Section and the customer accessible
space. If you require customer access to the optical UNI ports at your
installation site, you will need to order and install an SFP and Fiber
Demarcation Kit for each UNI port.

The Fiber Demarcation Kit is composed of two parts: an SC/SC adapter, and
a fiber jumper. Two types of Fiber Demarcation Kit are available, one for
multimode connections and one for single mode connections.

Each Fiber Demarcation Kit can cable a single optical UNI port. Up to four
Fiber Demarcation Kits can be installed per system. Make sure that you order
the Fiber Demarcation Kit that matches the SFP type. The list of supported
SFPs is documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-
2011-602).

Figure 10-5 shows the installed Fiber Demarcation Kits.

Figure 10-5
Installed Fiber Demarcation Kits (4 ports)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-10 3931 Service Delivery Switch

You can also deploy the 3931 system without the Fiber Demarcation Kits. In
those installations, the 3931 system contains 2 SFP+ NNI ports, and 4 copper
(RJ-45) UNI ports. The 4 optical UNI ports are not used.

Power Options
The 3931 can be installed with one or two power supplies located in the lower
left portion of the enclosure. Both AC and DC power supplies are available.
PS A is the left power supply and PS B is the right power supply.

Because the power unit is redundant, the power supplies are hot swappable
and field replaceable. With both power supplies installed, the power supplies
provide system power simultaneously (load sharing). During power supply
replacement, the remaining power supply will compensate to maintain
uninterrupted system operation. If one of the power supply units fails, it should
be replaced as soon as possible. Table 10-6 provides a summary of the
available power options.

Table 10-6
3931 Power Supply Overview

Module Part Number Power Range Breaker

Minimum Maximum

AC Power supply 170-0042-900 100/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 Amps 15 Amps


1.0 to 0.5 Amps

DC Power supply 170-0041-900 20 to 60 VDC, 4.0 Amps 4 Amps (at 24V or 10 Amps
36V)
2 Amps (at 48V)

Note: When two power supplies are installed, use power supplies of the same type. Do not combine
AC and DC power supplies in the same installation. This is an untested configuration and is not
supported.
Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local
and national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose
and meet the relevant electrical codes.
Note: The minimum 48VDC breaker value assumes that the back-up batteries at your facility are
configured to disconnect at a predefined level if the charging circuit is not restored. If your facility does
not have an automatic battery shutdown level of >20VDC, the recommended breaker value for 48VDC
will result in the breaker being tripped if power is not restored before the batteries exhaust. For
installations without automatic battery disconnect use the minimum recommended 24VDC breaker size.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-11

Figure 10-6
Installed Power Supplies

DC Power Supply
The DC power supply module is a wide range DC power module and accepts
input voltages of -/+48 V DC or -/+24 V DC.

WARNING
The 3931 DC power supply meets the surge requirements of
EN 61000-4-5 (+/-500V). For outdoor applications where the
DC feed can be exposed to surges in excess of this level,
external protection which limits the energy on the DC feed to
500V maximum is required.

The DC power cord should be wire size of 14 AWG to 18 AWG wire. Smaller
wire can be used depending on the input breaker.

Table 10-6 on page 10-10 summarizes the minimum and maximum breaker
values for 24 V, 36 V and 48 V input installations.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-12 3931 Service Delivery Switch

In order to allow power supply replacement without turning off the incoming
power, the power is terminated on the electronics module and connectorized
into the power supply. Separate feeds are recommended to avoid a single
breaker trip from taking both supplies out.

Dual Power Input Feeds


In order to allow power supply replacement without turning off the incoming
power, the power is terminated on the electronics module and connectorized
into the power supply. Two separate feeds are recommended to avoid a single
fuse/breaker trip from taking both supplies out of service.

Ciena recommends the installation of dual power input feeds, even when only
a single power supply is being used in the system. This allows you to easily
install a second power supply if it is needed at a future date. Alternatively, if a
problem occurs with the power wiring that is in use, it is possible to relocate
the single power supply to the other slot and use the other power wiring since
it is already in place.

Single Power Input Feed


If a single power input feed is required due to site constraints, power jumper
cables can be used to tie the power feeds for PS A and PS B together. This
allows a single power input feed to power redundant supplies and protect
against service outages due to power supply failure.
Note: A fuse is required at the power input source (see Table 10-6 on
page 10-10 for breaker values).

The jumper can be made by the technician and should be the same gauge
wire as the input power feed. The jumper wire should be approximately 3 long
and should have fork terminal spade lugs installed on both ends of the jumper
cable. Two jumper cables will be required.

AC Power Supply
The AC power supply module is a wide range AC power module and accepts
input voltages from 100 V to 240 V AC nominal. The AC power cord connects
to the faceplate of the module using a standard plug with an IEC C15
connector.

Note: To meet the requirements of GR-1089 Section 4.12 the use of an


external Surge Protection Device is required.

The faceplate is equipped with a bail lock mechanism to assist with power
cord retention. The bail lock snaps over the hood of the power cord and
prevents it from becoming accidentally unplugged when the power cord is
pulled. To remove the power cord from the AC power supply you need to flip
up the bail lock before tugging on the power cable.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-13

For each 3931 device with redundant power supplies you will need two power
cords. The exact specifications of the cord required will vary depending on
local power codes. You need to obtain the correct power cord to meet your
local requirements.

WARNING
All AC power cords must meet the requirements of the local
and national electric codes prior to installation.

Grounding
The 3931 chassis has a pre-installed cable gland in the center of the bottom
of the enclosure. The ground wire is threaded through the cable gland and
then connected to the ground location inside the chassis. See Figure 10-7 on
page 10-13.

Note: If the 3931 is installed and sealed without installing conduits or


cutting the grommets, it is possible that a vacuum will form in the
enclosure and it may be very difficult to open the door. If this happens the
cable gland should be loosened to allow air into the box. Once the door is
open the cable gland should be re-tightened.

The ground location is provided on the inside of the enclosure, center bottom.
See Figure 10-7 on page 10-13. This ground location uses a compression lug
(2 hole lug @ 5/8 centers and with hole size for #10 or 1/4 screw) and 2
screws. The ground lug and screws are provided with the 3931 enclosure.

Customer supplied ground wire is connected to the supplied lug. Ciena


recommends that the grounding wire be #6 AWG. See 3931 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3225-001) for a procedure.

Figure 10-7
Location of the 3931 Ground Lug

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-14 3931 Service Delivery Switch

Internal Alarms
The 3931 also has a few internal alarms built into the system. This section
provides a high-level summary of the following alarms:
Power Supply Failure
Dying Gasp
Door Alarm
Note: The 3931 also supports alarm inputs. See Alarm Inputs on page
10-19 for more information.

Power Supply Failure


If a problem occurs with the power supply, an alarm is raised and an SNMP
trap is sent. If the power supply has been disabled, an LED indication will also
occur showing the defective power supply is off. After a problem has been
identified, the power supply should be replaced. See 3931 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3225-001) for the procedures to remove
a power supply and install a new unit.

Dying Gasp
The 3931 supports dying gasp functionality. In the event of a power failure, the
3931 sends a dying gasp notification to the network. The notification also
contains a syslog entry (if syslog is enabled).

Note: When the system is powered by redundant power supplies, a dying


gasp message will only be sent if both power supplies lose power.

Door Alarm
The 3931 is equipped with 2 sensors to detect when the inner door and the
outer chassis door are open or closed. These sensors rely on pressure
switches near the center of the chassis, located just below PS B. The sensors
are labeled as follows:
T Telco. Indicates whether the inner (Telco) door is open or closed. This
is the top sensor. See Figure 10-8 on page 10-15.
C Customer. Indicates whether the outer (Customer) door is open or
closed. This is the bottom sensor. This sensor is visible when the inner
door is closed. See Figure 10-9 on page 10-15.
When either door is opened or closed, a trap is sent indicating the door (inner
or outer) and the state (open or closed).

When both doors are open, you can override the door alarm state by
depressing the C switch for 5 seconds or more. When the door override is
initiated, a trap is sent indicating that the inner door is in override state. This
can be used to quiet door alarms at the network operations center as it

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-15

indicates that a crafts person is working on the unit. The override state will also
be displayed on the DOOR LED. See 3931 Hardware Installation and Start-up
Manual (009-3225-001) for more information.

Figure 10-8
3931 Telco and Customer Door Sensors - Inner Door Open

Figure 10-9
3931 Customer Door Sensor - Inner Door Closed

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-16 3931 Service Delivery Switch

Resets
The 3931 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is located
below PS B and just above the DC terminal block. Figure 10-10 on page 10-16
shows the location of the reset button.

There are two different types of resets available:


Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than three seconds. A quick reset reboots the system with the current
saved configuration.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for three
seconds or more continuously. A hard reset erases the current
configuration and restores the unit to the factory default settings. See
Default configuration overview on page 18-1 for more information about
the factory default settings.
Note: It is also possible to initiate soft resets of the system through the
local console port, or the management VLAN. Instructions for initiating a
soft reset are included in the 39XX/51XX Command Reference (009-
3220-010).

Figure 10-10
Location of the 3931 Reset Button

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-17

Default Configuration
If the 3931 does not have an operational configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
Packet Networking portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview
on page 18-1. See that chapter for additional information.

Interfaces
This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 3931 including:
1/10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
Console Port (EIA-561)
Figure 10-11 shows where each port is located within the 3931 enclosure.

Note: The N/C (No Connect) port, located between the Console and
Optical NNI ports, is used by Ciena during the manufacturing and testing
process. You should not attempt to use this port.

Figure 10-11
3931 Port Overview

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-18 3931 Service Delivery Switch

For optical ports, you will need to order SFPs and Fiber Demarcation Kits
(containing optical jumpers) to support your configuration. Make sure you
order the correct SFP (multimode or single mode) and Fiber Demarcation Kit
(multimode or single mode) to match the equipment terminating the optical
link. The list of supported SFPs is documented in Packet Networking
Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).

WARNING
All electrical interfaces on this product are intended for intra-
building connections only. These interfaces are designed as
type 2 or type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-Core, Issue 5
and require isolation from the exposed outside plant cabling.

Note: Cabling and wiring that is part or the same physical installation,
even if it exits the building or enclosure for a short distance, should
generally be classified as intra-building.

1/10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports


The 3931 has two high-capacity ports identified as port 9 (left optical port) and
port 10 (right optical port) located in the upper left of the 3931 enclosure. In
Figure 10-11 these ports are identified as Optical NNI Ports 9 & 10. The LED
indications are provided in 3931 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual
(009-3225-001).

These NNI ports are used to connect to the service providers network and
support a 1 Gbps SFP or an 10 Gbps SFP+ module. You will need to order
SFPs to support your configuration. Make sure you order the correct SFP
(multimode or single mode) to match the equipment terminating the optical
link. These ports do not require the Fiber Demarcation Kits.

10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports


There are 8 UNI ports in the system:
Four copper RJ-45 ports located across the upper portion of the Telco
Section of the enclosure. The copper ports support the speeds 10/100/
1000 Mbps. These ports are numbered 5 (left port) to 8 (right port). In
Figure 10-11 on page 10-17 these ports are identified as Copper UNI Ports
5-8. The LED indications are provided in 3931 Hardware Installation and
Start-up Manual (009-3225-001).
Note: To meet GR-1089-Core requirements shielded Cat 5 or better
cables are required. Ensure that both ends of the shielded cable are
properly grounded.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3931 Service Delivery Switch 10-19

Four optical SFP ports located inside the Telco Section of the
enclosure. The optical ports support the speeds 100/1000 Mbps. The
optical ports are numbered 1 (left port) to 4 (right port). In Figure 10-11 on
page 10-17 these ports are identified as Optical UNI Ports 1-4. The LED
indications are provided in 3931 Hardware Installation and Start-up
Manual (009-3225-001).
Note: When the optical UNI ports are used, a Fiber Demarcation Kit must
also be installed for each port. See Fiber Demarcation Kit (Optional) on
page 10-9 for more information.

Note: You will also need to order the applicable SFPs for these four ports.
See Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602) for the
list of supported SFPs.

Console Port (EIA-561)


The 3931 includes one serial port with RJ-45 connector for maintenance
purposes. This port is located on the top left of the system board and is labeled
Console. The two LEDs present on the connector are unused.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the Packet
Networking portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1.
See that chapter for additional information.

Alarm Inputs
The 3931 supports 5 external alarm inputs. A screw-down terminal-block type
connector is used to accept the external alarms.

The specifications of this port have been fully documented in the Alarms
chapter. See Terminal Block Alarm Inputs on page 19-6 for more information
about this port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
10-20 3931 Service Delivery Switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
11-1

3932 Service Delivery Switch 11-

The 3932 provides premium 1/10 Gbps Carrier Ethernet Service Delivery
capability together with packet synchronization and DS1/E1 TDM service
capabilities over multi-service pseudo wires.

This powerful system is ideal for mobile backhaul applications, business


services where a mix of 1/10 GbE and DS1/E1 business services are needed
and SMART grid applications.

An overview of the chassis is provided in Figure 11-1.

Figure 11-1
Front view of the 3932
MGMT 10M/100M
DS1/E1 SYNC ALARMS
Power Modules

100M/1G Console
1G/10G
10M/100M/1G 10MHz 1PPS

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
11-2 3932 Service Delivery Switch

Hardware Overview
The product is designed so that all the user and management interfaces are
located on the front of the chassis. Table 11-1 provides a quick overview of
the interfaces available on the 3932 and Figure 11-1 on page 11-1 provides a
view of the front of the 3932.

Table 11-1
3932 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Description


Ports

NNI/UNI 2 1/10 Gigabit Ethernet ports with SFP/SFP+ connectors. These are ports
9 and 10.
The SFP+ connectors also support the use of 1G SFP optics.

NNI/UNI 4 100/1000 Mbps ports with SFP connectors. The SFPs support both 100
Mbps and 1000 Mbps speeds. These are ports 5 to 8.

NNI/UNI 4 Combo RJ-45/SFP ports. These are ports 1 to 4. Port speeds as follows:
SFPs support both 100 and 1000 Mbps
RJ-45 support 10, 100 and 1000 Mbps
The combo ports have both a copper and an optical version of the same
port. Both ports can be cabled, however only one of the pair of copper/optic
ports will be active at any time. The combo ports are controlled through the
software.

DS1/E1 16 DS1/E1 ports. The connections are made using two 44-pin high density
D-sub connectors.

Management 1 10/100 Mbps copper port (RJ-45) for out-of-band management

Console 1 Serial EIA-561 (RJ-45) port

Sync 1 BITS-In or BITS-Out, 1PPS and Time of Day (future).

1 PPS 1 1 PPS external synchronization port and Time of Day (future).

10 MHz 1 10 MHz external synchronization port.

Alarm 1 26-pin D-sub plug with custom pin-out

Note: For the combo ports, only one of the two ports will be active. Either the copper or the optical port
will be active.
Note: Only Ciena approved optics can be used with the 3932. The SFP/SFP+ summary and orderable
part numbers are contained in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).
Note: For additional information about the external timing ports see External timing on page 20-1.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3932 Service Delivery Switch 11-3

Chassis Size and Weight


The chassis of the 3932 occupies 1 rack unit (RU) of a standard 19-inch
equipment frame, allowing up to 42 devices in a single frame. The chassis has
the following dimensions:
Width: 44.4 cm (17.5 inches)
Depth: 25.4 cm (10 inches)
Height: 4.4 cm (1.75 inches)
The chassis is designed so that the power cabling and all interface cabling is
located on the faceplate of the chassis. The grounding cable is installed on the
rear of the chassis. For more information see Grounding on page 11-9.

Additional Clearances
To provide sufficient clearance for cabling and airflow, Ciena recommends the
following clearances:
Rear of chassis: 6.4 cm (2.5 inches)
Front of chassis: 7.6 cm (3 inches)
Note: The 3932 also draws air through intake vents on the right side of
the chassis. When the unit is installed you should ensure that this area is
not obstructed by cables running along the side of the frame.

System Weight
Before you start, ensure that the frame or mounting surface (wallmount
installations) is capable of supporting the weight of the system. Table 11-2
provides a list of the components that can be used in a system and their
weight.

Table 11-2
3932 Component Weight Summary

Component Weight (lbs) Weight (kg)

3932 without power supplies 8.62 3.91

AC power supply (up to 2 of these are used) 1.69 0.77

DC power supply (up to 2 of these are used) 1.8 0.82

3932 with 2 AC power supplies 12.01 5.45

3932 with 2 DC power supplies 12.24 5.55

Note: There will also be a small amount of incremental weight for SFPs and cabling.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
11-4 3932 Service Delivery Switch

Mounting
The following mounting brackets are available:
19-inch frame (this bracket is part of the 3932 kit)
23-inch frame
Wall Mount
The brackets are attached to the chassis using 3 (wallmount bracket) or 4
(frame mount brackets) screw holes.

The frame mount brackets are also compatible with cable support brackets
that are designed to keep cables out of adjacent equipment space. See 3932
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3227-001) for more
information.

The wallmount bracket allows the chassis to be mounted on a wall. The


wallmount bracket does not contain any cable management features. See
3932 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3227-001) for more
information.

Note: For installations using the wallmount bracket, the hardware


required to attach the mounting bracket to the wall is Customer supplied.
In addition, the reinforced mounting surface should be capable of
supporting approximately 100 pounds. Please ensure that the hardware
used includes the proper fasteners/anchors required to support the weight
of the unit.

Power Options
The 3932 has redundant power supplies which are accessed from the front of
the chassis. Both AC and DC power supplies are available. The system is also
capable of operation with a single power supply, however redundant power
supplies are recommended. When a single power supply is used, the empty
power supply bay must be covered with a filler plate. A filler plate is provided
with the base system.

Because the power unit is redundant, the power supplies are hot swappable
and field replaceable. With both power supplies installed, the power supplies
provide system power simultaneously (load sharing). During power supply
replacement, the remaining power supply will compensate to maintain
uninterrupted system operation. If one of the power supply units fails, it should
be replaced as soon as possible.

Note: The system can remain on, however, the power module being
removed and installed must be unpowered. In some configurations,
replacing a power supply can be a service impacting procedure.

Note: The 3930, 3932 and 5142 all use the same power supplies.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3932 Service Delivery Switch 11-5

Table 11-3 provides a summary of the available power options.

Table 11-3
3932 Power Supply Overview

Module Part Number Power Range Breaker

AC power supply 170-0014-900 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 Amp


1.0 to 0.5 Amps

DC power supply 170-0013-900 20V DC to 60V DC, 5 Amps (24V or 36V)


4.0 Amps or 2.5 Amps (48V)

Note: When two power supplies are installed, use power supplies of the same type. Do not combine
AC and DC power supplies in the same installation. This is an untested configuration and is not
supported.
Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local and
national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose and
meet the relevant electrical codes.

DC Power Supply
The DC power supply module is a wide range DC power module and accepts
a range of input voltages (see Table 11-3) including -/+48 V DC, -/+36 V DC
or -/+24 V DC.

The connections to the DC mains and ground are made using a terminal block
available on the faceplate of each power supply.

The DC power cord should be a 14 AWG - 18 AWG wire. You will also need
to install fork terminal spade lugs on the power cord wires to ensure a proper
connection with the terminal block of the power supply. Table 11-4 on page
11-6 contains a summary of the recommended locking fork terminal lugs.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
11-6 3932 Service Delivery Switch

Table 11-4
3932 DC Lug Summary

Wire Size Stud Maximum Lug Width Recommended Lug

14 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6FF-C (16-14 AWG)

14 and 18 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6LF-C (18-14 AWG)

Panduit PV14-6LFW-C (18-14 AWG)

18 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV18-6FF-CY (22-16 AWG)

Panduit PV18-6LF-CY (22-18 AWG)

Panduit PV18-6LFW-CY (22-18 AWG)

Note: Use one of these recommended lugs or a close equivalent. If a ring lug is used, you will need to
remove and reinstall the screw. Take care not to lose the screw during this process.

Table 11-3 on page 11-5 summarizes the minimum breaker values for 24 V,
36 V and 48 V input installations.

In order to successfully replace the power supply while the unit is operating,
the DC power supplies must be powered off separate breakers. This allows
you to turn off power feeding the power supply that is being replaced. While
the second independent circuit remains on, and powers the unit during the
replacement process. As a result, Ciena recommends that each DC power
supply be connected to a separate breaker.

AC Power Supply
The AC power supply module is a wide range AC power module and accepts
input voltages of 100 V to 240 V AC nominal. The AC power cord connects to
the faceplate of the module using a standard plug.

WARNING

As per GR-1089 Section 4.12 an external Surge Protective


Device (SPD) is required at the AC input of the 3932.

The faceplate is equipped with a bail lock mechanism to assist with power
cord retention. The bail lock snaps over the hood of the power cord and
prevents it from becoming accidentally unplugged when the power cord is
pulled. To remove the power cord from the AC power supply you need to
remove the bail lock before tugging on the power cable.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3932 Service Delivery Switch 11-7

For each 3932 device with redundant power supplies you will need two power
cords. The exact specifications of the cord required will vary depending on:
AC or DC power supply
local power codes for example, the configuration of the plug that is
attached to the power source will vary for each region around the world.
You need to obtain the correct power cord to meet your local
requirements.

WARNING

All AC power cords must meet the requirements of the local


and national electric codes prior to installation.

Ciena offers the following AC power cables for the 3932:


AC Power Cord, IEC C13, Europe
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, North America
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, United Kingdom
AC Power Cord, C13, Universal
Power Status LEDs
The status of the power supplies is visible on the faceplate of the 3932 through
the INPUT and OUTPUT LEDs on each power supply. See the 3932
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3227-001) for a detailed
description of the LED indications.

Power Supply Failure


If a problem occurs with the power supply, an alarm is raised and an SNMP
trap is sent. If the power supply has been disabled, an LED indication will also
occur showing the defective power supply is off.

After a problem has been identified, the power supply should be replaced. See
3932 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3227-001) for the
procedures to remove a power supply and install a new unit.

Dying Gasp
The 3932 supports dying gasp functionality. In the event of a power failure, the
3932 sends a dying gasp notification to the network. The notification also
contains a syslog entry (if syslog is enabled).

Note: When the system is powered by redundant power supplies, a dying


gasp message will only be sent if both power supplies lose power.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
11-8 3932 Service Delivery Switch

Environmental Control
The 3932 is designed for deployment in Outdoor Street Cabinets, huts and
other unconditioned locations and supports the following environmental
range:
-40C to +65C (-40F to 149F) operating ambient temperature up to an
altitude of 4000 m
-40C to +70C storage temperature
5% to 95% non-condensing humidity
Extreme Temperature Conditions
The 3932 has internal temperature sensors that monitor the temperature
within the unit. The software supports alarms, traps and logs at user
configurable temperature thresholds.

When temperatures exceed the maximum operating temperature, an


automatic over temperature shutdown is initiated to protect the 3932 from
damage. The system is powered down but the fans remain on to assist with
cooling the unit. The thermal switch continues to monitor the temperature, and
when the temperature returns to the supported operating temperature range,
the unit will automatically restart and resume service.

Fans and Airflow


The 3932 chassis is equipped with three fans to provide adequate airflow. The
fans draw air from the front and right side of the unit, and exhaust out the rear.
The 7.6 cm (3 inch) installation clearance at the front and 6.4 cm (2.5 inch)
clearance at the back of the unit assists with air flow by ensuring that the vents
of the unit are not blocked. You should also ensure that the air vents on the
right side of the chassis are not obstructed by cables running along the side
of the frame.

When only one power supply is installed in the 3932, the second power supply
bay must be covered with a filler plate. The filler plate is necessary to ensure
proper airflow within the 3932. The unit is initially supplied with a filler plate. If
it is misplaced, a replacement can be ordered from Ciena.

Fan Failure
If a fan failure occurs, an alarm is raised and an SNMP trap is sent. When a
single fan fails in the 3932 the platform continues to function normally and
meet all specifications. However, the unit should be scheduled for servicing by
Ciena. Replacing the fans is a service impacting repair since the unit must be
taken completely offline and returned to Ciena for repair. If a unit is returned
for a fan failure, all three fans in the system are replaced by Ciena.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3932 Service Delivery Switch 11-9

Grounding
The 3932 is connected to ground at the power supplies and the chassis.

Note: The Battery Return lead is considered DC-I (isolated from frame
ground) as described in GR-1089-Core, Issue 5.

Power Supply Grounding


The safety ground connection is provided by the AC power cord or by the
grounding terminal on the DC power supply. Further details are provided in
3932 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3227-001).

WARNING

The AC version relies on the AC power cord for Safety ground.


The outlet providing power to the 3932 must meet the Local
and National Safety codes.

WARNING

The DC version relies on the connector at the front of the


power supply to provide Safety Ground. This grounding
connection must be properly attached when the 3932 is
installed.

Supplemental Ground
A supplemental ground location is provided on the back of the chassis. This
ground location will support a 2-hole lug.

The grounding screws are provided and are located on the rear of the chassis
in the center. See Figure 11-2 on page 11-10 for the location of the grounding
screws.

The grounding lug and grounding wire are customer supplied. The following
description indicates the required specifications:
#6 AWG (minimum) wire
2 hole lug @ 5/8 centers and with hole size for #10 or 1/4 screw
The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines, and the grounding procedures used by your
company.

The DC resistance between the chassis and the supplemental ground source
should be verified to be less than 100 milliohms.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
11-10 3932 Service Delivery Switch

Figure 11-2
Rear of the 3932 Chassis and Rear Grounding Screw Location

Resets
It is possible to initiate soft resets of the system through the local console port,
local management port, or the management VLAN. Instructions for initiating a
soft reset are included in the 39XX/51XX Command Reference (009-3220-
010). This is the recommended way to reset the system.

The 3932 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is located to the
left of the management port on the far right of the chassis. Figure 11-3 shows
the location of the reset button.

Figure 11-3
Location of the 3932 Reset Button

Reset Button

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3932 Service Delivery Switch 11-11

There are two different types of resets available:


Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than three seconds. A quick reset reboots the system with the current
saved configuration. When you press the reset button for less than 3
seconds, all the LEDs on the faceplate will be lit.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for three
seconds or more continuously. When you press the reset button for more
than 3 seconds, all the LEDs on the faceplate will be lit, then they will flash
to indicate that the hard reset has been initiated. A hard reset erases the
current configuration and restores the unit to the factory default settings.
See Default configuration overview on page 18-1 for more information
about the factory default settings.
Note: If the reset button is pressed when the system is unresponsive, an
additional logging behavior will be triggered. See Creating a State Dump
or Core Dump Log File on page 11-11 for more information.

Note: Pressing the reset button will also result in an LED indication. The
LED behavior is described in 3932 Hardware Installation and Start-up
Manual (009-3227-001).

Creating a State Dump or Core Dump Log File


Two types of log files are available:
State dump log The state dump provides a summary of the current and
previous state of the system.
Core dump log The core dump provides a summary of the processes
that were running when the system became unresponsive.
The creation of these files is triggered by depressing the reset button (for
either a quick or hard reset) on 3932 systems.

The log file creation varies depending on the state of the system when the
reset button is depressed. One of the following scenarios will occur:
System was responsive when the reset button was depressed The
state dump file is generated before the system reboots. There will be
minimal delay (approximately 5 seconds) while the state dump file is
created and stored to the system memory. After the state dump file is
created the system will reboot.
System was unresponsive when the reset button was depressed
In this case a full core dump will be initiated, and then a state dump. There
will be a delay (up to 2 minutes) while the core dump file is created and
stored to system memory. Next the state dump file is created and stored
to system memory. After the both the core dump and state dump files are
created the system will reboot.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
11-12 3932 Service Delivery Switch

When the system reboots, you will be able to retrieve the state dump file and
core dump file (if it exists) from the system. The log files are stored in the
following locations:
State dump log files: /mnt/sysfs/log/push_button_state-dump
Note: If a state dump file already exists on the system, it will be renamed
push_button_state-dump.prev when the new file is created.

Core dump log files: /tmp/corefiles/


These files can be used to assist with troubleshooting the system.

Default Configuration
If the 3932 does not have an operational configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
Packet Networking portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview
on page 18-1. Please see that chapter for additional information.

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 3932 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit. With
the exception of the Console port, Alarm port and the DS1/E1 ports, all the
interfaces have integrated LEDs which provide status information for the port.
Figure 11-1 on page 11-1shows the faceplate of the unit and identifies the
locations of the different ports.

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 3932 including:
10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
DS1/E1 Ports
Local Management Port (10/100)
Sync Port
1 PPS
10 MHz
Console Port (EIA-561)
External Alarm Inputs
10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The faceplate of the 3932 has two high-capacity ports labelled Port 9 and
Port 10. These ports can be configured as either NNI or UNI ports and support
both SFP and SFP+ modules.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3932 Service Delivery Switch 11-13

These ports are capable of operating at 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps (SFP+) speeds.


The port characteristics are set by the capabilities of the SFPs that are
installed. The SFP ports conform to the IEEE 802.3ae 10-Gigabit Ethernet
standard and are hot-swappable.

These ports also include integrated status LEDs. See 3932 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3227-001) for more information.

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported SFP/SFP+ optics
is documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-
602). When the 3932 is installed in an outdoor application, extended
temperature optics are required.

10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports


The 3932 has eight 1 Gbps Ethernet ports. Ports 1 to 4 are combo ports, with
both an RJ-45 jack and an SFP option available for that port. The SFP ports
are organized in a single row on the front left/center of the chassis with Port 1
on the left and Port 8 on the right/center.

The RJ-45 copper ports support 10/100/1000 Mbps operation with auto-
negotiation of speed and duplex as well as auto-MDI/MDIX. These RJ-45
ports are GR-1089 Type 4 ports and are intended for indoor use only. These
ports are fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard and
IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-T standard. When connecting to the RJ-45 copper
ports Cat 5 UTP cables are recommended.

The SFP ports support 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps speeds. The port
characteristics are set by the capabilities of the SFPs that are installed. The
SFPs ports conform to the IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet standard.

For the combo ports which support both RJ-45 and SFPs, if both the SFP and
the RJ-45 are cabled, the system will default to using the SFP port. You can
modify this default in the software after the system becomes active.

Both the RJ-45 and SFP ports also include integrated status LEDs. See 3932
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3227-001) for more
information.

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported SFPs is


documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).
When the 3932 is installed in an outdoor application, extended temperature
SFPs are required.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
11-14 3932 Service Delivery Switch

DS1/E1 Ports
The 3932 has 16 DS1/E1 ports. The connections are made using two 44-pin
high density D-sub connectors. Each connector supports 8 DS1/E1
interfaces.

These ports are TDM DS1/E1 interfaces and can also be used for pseudowire
emulation to transport the TDM signals over the packet switched network.

Ciena offers a 6 foot long cable (170-0082-900) for connection to these ports.
The cable is a 16 pair 24 AWG 100/120 Ohm cable with a D-sub HD44
connector on one end for attachment to the 3932 chassis. The other end of
the cable fans out into eight separate pairs with an RJ-45 male connector per
pair.

Local Management Port (10/100)


The 3932 includes one 10/100 Mbps port for out-of-band management. This
port is located on the right of the faceplate and is labeled MGMT 10M/100M.
This port uses an RJ-45 connector and is fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3u
1000Base-Tx Ethernet standard.

Ciena requires the use of a Cat 5 STP cable or better for the management
port. The cable shield must be terminated at both ends. This port is classified
as intra-building only.

The management port can be used to attach a PC directly to the device, or it


can be connected to the network for management. The management port
uses auto-MDI/MDIX. A straight through (MDI) or a crossover cable (MDIX)
can be connected to this port. Connection speed and duplex are negotiated
with auto-negotiation.

This port also includes integrated status LEDs. See 3932 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3227-001) for more information.

Sync Port
The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled SYNC. This
port is used as either a BITS-IN or BITS-OUT interface.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See Sync port on
page 20-3 for more information about this port.

1 PPS
The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled 1PPS.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See 1 PPS on page
20-6 for more information about this port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3932 Service Delivery Switch 11-15

10 MHz
The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled 10MHz.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See 10 MHz on page
20-7 for more information about this port.

Console Port (EIA-561)


The 3932 includes one serial port with RJ-45 connector for maintenance
purposes. This port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled
Console. The two LEDs present on the connector are unused.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the Packet
Networking portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1.
Please see that chapter for additional information.

External Alarm Inputs


The 3932 supports 16 external alarm inputs. The alarm connector is located
in the center/right section of the 3932 labeled ALARMS.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the Alarms chapter. See Alarm Custom Pin-out
(26-pin D-sub connector) on page 19-5 for more information about this port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
11-16 3932 Service Delivery Switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
12-1

3940 Service Delivery Switch 12-

Cienas 3940 is an Ethernet access system that cost-effectively delivers


sophisticated business and transport services via fiber or copper connections.
It features a high-capacity switching fabric with 24 GbE ports in a compact
(1RU) form factor that allows front access to all data and management
interfaces. This efficient packaging design provides both SFP and RJ-45
connectors for the user ports, enabling the 3940 to be deployed for service
demarcation, aggregation, and transport applications in a wide variety of
physical environments and network topologies, including fiber and microwave
rings, point-to-point fiber, microwave mesh, fiber or copper to subscriber, and
more.

Hardware Overview
The 3940 is a next-generation Gigabit Ethernet SAS for business demarcation
applications, providing basic Ethernet Private Line (EPL), Ethernet Virtual
Private Line (EVPL), and Ethernet-Local Area Network (E-LAN) services as
well as the ability to deploy across a range of office, outside controlled
environment cabinets, and Point of Presence (POP)/Central Office (CO)
scenarios at a competitive price.

The product is designed so that all the user and management interfaces are
located on the front of the chassis. Table 12-1 on page 12-2 provides a quick
overview of the interfaces available on the 3940. Power connections are
located on the rear of the device.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
12-2 3940 Service Delivery Switch

Table 12-1
3940 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Ports Description

NNI/UNI 4 100M/Gigabit combo RJ-45/SFP ports.

UNI 20 100M/Gigabit combo RJ-45/SFP ports.

Console 1 Serial EIA-232 (DB-9) port for out-of-band management.

Management 1 10/100/1000 copper port (RJ-45) for out-of-band management

Note: All ports can be active at the same time.

On the 3940, the Status LEDs for the 10/100/1000BASE-TX ports are
integrated into each port. The 100/1000 Mbps SFP ports share these same
status LEDs. Status LEDs for the 10/100/1000BASE-TX management port
are also integrated into the port itself. See Figure 12-1 for more information.

Figure 12-1
3940 Front View

Unit Status LEDs Console Port

NNI/UNI UNI
10/100/1000M 10/100/1000M
Local Management Port

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3940 Service Delivery Switch 12-3

Chassis Size and Weight


The chassis of the 3940 occupies 1 rack unit (RU) of a standard 19-inch
equipment frame, allowing up to 42 devices in a single frame.

Table 12-2 provides a summary of the system dimensions.

Table 12-2
3940 Chassis Size and Weight

Attribute Value (Metric) Value (Imperial)

Width 44.45 cm 17.5 inches

Depth 36.83 cm 14.5 inches

Height 4.44 cm 1.75 inches

Weight 6.9 kg 15 lbs

The chassis is designed so that the power cabling is located on the rear of the
chassis. While all the interface cabling is located on the faceplate of the
chassis.

Note: To provide sufficient clearance for cabling, Ciena recommends that


an additional 7.62 cm (3 inches) of space be available to the front and rear
of the chassis. This clearance also assists with providing proper airflow for
thermal management.

Mounting
The following mounting brackets are available:
19-inch frame (this bracket is part of the 3940 kit)
23-inch frame
Wallmount
There are threaded holes on the side of the chassis used for attaching the
mounting brackets. The 3940 can be mounted in either front or mid-mount
position.

Power Options
The 3940 is powered by redundant, hot-swappable, AC or DC power supply
modules, which are accessed from the rear of the chassis. When two power
supplies are installed, the power supplies provide system power
simultaneously (load sharing).

Table 12-3 on page 12-4 provides a summary of the available power options.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
12-4 3940 Service Delivery Switch

Table 12-3
3940 Power Supply Options

Module Part number Power range Breaker

AC Power Supply 170-0100-901 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, drawing 0.5/0.2 Amps 2 Amps

DC Power Supply 170-0101-901 -72 to -40.5 VDC, drawing 2.1/1.3 Amps 6 Amps

Note: When two power supplies are installed, use power supplies of the same type. Do not combine
AC and DC power supplies in the same installation. This is an untested configuration and is not
supported.
Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local
and national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose
and meet the relevant electrical codes.

When only one power supply is to be installed, it should be located in the bay
labeled PS A. When facing the back of the unit, PS A is the left bay, as seen
in Figure 12-2. The second power supply bay must be covered with a cover
plate. The cover plate is required for safety and to ensure proper airflow within
the chassis.

Figure 12-2
Rear of 3940

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3940 Service Delivery Switch 12-5

DC Power Supply
The DC power supply module is a wide range DC power module and accepts
input voltages of -/+48 V DC or -/+24 V DC.

The connections to the DC mains and ground are made using a terminal block
available on the faceplate of each power supply.

The DC power cord should be a 12 AWG - 14 AWG wire. You will also need
to install fork terminal spade lugs on the power cord wires to ensure a proper
connection with the terminal block of the power supply. Table 12-4 contains a
summary of the recommended locking fork terminal lugs. You will need three
cable lugs (per power supply).

Table 12-4
3940 DC Lug Summary

Wire Size Stud Maximum Lug Width Recommended Lug

12 AWG #8 0.35 Panduit PV10-8LF-L (12-10 AWG)

12 and 14 AWG #8 0.35 Panduit PV10-8FF-L (14-10 AWG)

14 AWG #8 0.35 Panduit PV14-8LF-C (18-14 AWG)

Panduit PV14-8FF-C (16-14 AWG)

Note: Use one of these recommended lugs or a close equivalent. If a ring lug is used, you will need to
remove and reinstall the screw. Take care not to lose the screw during this process.

Power Supply Fan


Each power supply includes a built-in fan to ensure adequate cooling of the
power supply. These fans are separate from the fans built-into the chassis. To
maintain adequate cooling, the power supply and system fans need to be kept
clear of obstructions.

Environmental Control
The 3940 offers redundant fans to provide a cooling air flow across the
internal components. The unit can provide adequate cooling even when one
of the fans has failed. If a fan does fail, an alarm/SNMP trap is generated so
that the unit can be replaced in the next maintenance window. To ensure that
the fan assembly can provide adequate cooling, always provide a minimum of
3 inches (8 cm) of clearance on the front and back of the chassis.

The 3940 implements an automatic over-temperature shutdown to protect


electronic components from damage. It will automatically restart when the
ambient temperature returns within the supported operating range.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
12-6 3940 Service Delivery Switch

Fan Failure
If a fan failure occurs, an alarm is raised and an SNMP trap is sent. When a
fan fails in the 3940, all three fans in the system should be replaced.
Replacing the fans is a service impacting repair since the unit must be taken
completely offline and returned to Ciena for repair. Fans are not customer
serviceable.

Grounding
The 3940 is connected to ground at the power supplies and also offers a
supplemental grounding connector on the chassis.

Power supply grounding


The safety ground connection is provided by the AC power cord or by the
grounding terminal on the DC power supply. For more information see 3940
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3230-001)).

WARNING
The AC power supply relies on the AC power cord for the
Safety Ground. The outlet providing power to the chassis must
meet the Local and National Safety codes.

WARNING
The DC power supply relies on the lug connector on the power
supply to provide the Safety Ground. This grounding
connection must be properly attached when the 3940 is
installed. Refer to 3940 Hardware Installation and Start-up
Manual (009-3230-001)) for more information.

Supplemental ground
Two holes, located on the left side of the back of the chassis are provided for
connecting a grounding lug to the chassis (see Figure 12-2 on page 12-4).

Grounding screws are provided, however the customer is required to provide


the grounding lug and grounding wire, according to the following
specifications:
#6 AWG (minimum) wire
2 hole lug @ 5/8 centers and with hole size for #10-32 or 1/4 screw (use
UL listed two hole lug Thomas and Betts part number 256-31426-9 or an
equivalent)
The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines and the grounding procedures used by your
company. The DC resistance between the chassis and the supplemental
ground source should be verified to be less than 25 milliohms.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3940 Service Delivery Switch 12-7

Resets
The 3940 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is located to the
left of the management port on the far right of the chassis. Figure 12-3 shows
the location of the reset button.

Figure 12-3
Location of 3940 Reset Button

The reset button can be used to perform one of the following functions:
Quick reset pushing the reset button for less than 2 seconds will reboot
the device retaining its current configuration.
Hard reset pushing and holding down the reset button for more than 2
seconds will reset the device, restoring it to the factory default settings.

WARNING
A system reset should ONLY be performed when all other
troubleshooting efforts have failed to resolve the problem.
Pressing the Reset button resets the entire system. Flash
memory, including application and configuration data, are
erased. The device reverts to the factory default settings.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
12-8 3940 Service Delivery Switch

Default Configuration
If the 3940 does not have an operation configuration, the default configuration
is utilized. The default configuration for the products in the Packet Networking
portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview on page 18-1. See
that chapter for additional information.

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 3940 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit. With
the exception of the EIA-232 Console port, all the interfaces have integrated
LEDs which provide status information for the port. Figure 12-1 on page 12-2
shows the faceplate of the unit and identifies the locations of the different
ports.

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 3960 including:
NNI/UNI Ports (4)
UNI Ports (20)
Local Management Port
Console Port
NNI/UNI Ports (4)
The 3940 provides 4 combo RJ-45/SFP Gigabit Ethernet NNI uplink ports that
can also function as UNI subscriber ports. These ports are located on the left
side of the unit and are numbered as ports 21-24 from left to right.

These ports can be either 100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X or 10/100/1000BASE-


TX Ethernet ports. The combo ports provide connectivity using either a small
form factor, pluggable (SFP) optic or an RJ-45 connector. By default, if an SFP
is inserted and there is a cable connected to the RJ-45 connector for the same
port, the SFP will be active and the RJ-45 disabled. These ports operate only
in full duplex mode, are autonegotiating and auto MDIX, and conform to the
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standards. The document Packet Networking
Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602) lists the SFPs supported for this
product. The SFPs are hot-swappable, allowing compliant optics to be
plugged in to change the external interface of the port, thus providing a mix of
possible distances and media types.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3940 Service Delivery Switch 12-9

UNI Ports (20)


The 3940 also includes 20 UNI ports, for connecting subscriber devices and
other downstream equipment. These ports are numbered 1-20 from left to
right and are located between the NNI/UNI port number 24 and the Console
and MGMT ports.

These ports can be either 100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X or 10/100/1000BASE-


TX Ethernet ports. The combo ports provide connectivity using either a small
form factor, pluggable (SFP) optic or an RJ-45 connector. By default, if an SFP
is inserted and there is a cable connected to the RJ-45 connector for the same
port, the SFP will be active and the RJ-45 disabled. These ports operate only
in full duplex mode, are autonegotiating and auto MDIX, and conform to the
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standards. The document Packet Networking
Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602) lists the SFPs supported for this
product. The SFPs are hot-swappable, allowing compliant optics to be
plugged in to change the external interface of the port, thus providing a mix of
possible distances and media types.

Local Management Port


One 10/100/1000BASE-TX, autonegotiating, auto MDIX port (labeled as
MGMT) is provided for out-of-band management. This port uses an RJ-45
connector and is fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standards. The
management port can be used to attach a PC directly to the device or it can
be connected to the network for management.

Ciena requires the use of a Cat 5 STP cable or better for the Management
port. The cable shield must be terminated at both ends. This port is classified
as intra-building only.

This port also includes integrated status LEDs. The RJ-45 ports have two
integrated LEDs, located at the top of the port, that indicate port status.

Console Port
The 3940 also includes an external serial console port on the front of the
device, labeled Console. The console port can be used to attach a terminal or
a PC to the device, for local craft access.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the Packet
Networking portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1.
See that chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
12-10 3940 Service Delivery Switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
13-1

3960 Service Delivery Switch 13-

Cienas 3960 is an Ethernet access system that cost-effectively delivers


10GbE and 1GbE business and transport Ethernet services via fiber or copper
connections. It features a high-capacity switching fabric, four 10GbE ports and
eight 1GbE ports in a compact (1RU) form factor with redundant power supply
modules. This efficient packaging design enables the 3960 to be deployed in
a wide variety of physical environments and service delivery topologies
supporting 10G demarcation, enterprise customers, wireless backhaul
providers, and 10G/1G applications.

Hardware Overview
The 3960 (Ciena part number 170-3960-901) is a high capacity 10 Gigabit
Ethernet SDS. Both AC and DC power options are available. The redundant
power supplies are hot swappable and field replaceable and are accessed
from the rear of the chassis.

The product is designed so that all the user and management interfaces are
located on the front of the chassis. Table 13-1 on page 13-1 provides a quick
overview of the interfaces available on the 3960.

Table 13-1
3960 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Ports Description

NNI 4 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports with XFP connectors. The 10 Gigabit


ports can be used as either NNI or UNI ports. Two of the ports
(Ports 11 and 12) support enhanced features.

UNI 8 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45/SFP combo ports. The SFPs support


both 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps speeds.

Console 1 Serial EIA-232 (DB-9) port for out-of-band management.

Management 1 10/100/1000 copper port (RJ-45) for out-of-band management

Note: All ports can be active at the same time.


Note: Only Ciena approved optics can be used with the 3960. For more information see Packet
Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
13-2 3960 Service Delivery Switch

WARNING
The 3960 is intended for indoor applications only. All electrical
connections are indoor. Subscriber ports on the 3960 are
intended for interconnection within the providers network only.
However, connection to multiple providers networks (or the
PSTN) can be achieved using other solutions that are available
within the Ciena Corporation family of products.

The front panel of the chassis also provides status LEDs for the 3960 unit, and
all the ports. See Figure 13-1 on page 13-2 for more information.

Figure 13-1
3960 Front View

10/100/1000M 10G
Unit Status LEDs Console Port
Local Management Port

Chassis Size and Weight


The chassis of the 3960 occupies 1 rack unit (RU) of a standard 19-inch
equipment frame, allowing up to 42 devices in a single frame.

Table 13-2 provides a summary of the system dimensions.

Table 13-2
3960 Chassis Size and Weight

Attribute Value (Metric) Value (Imperial)

Width 44.45 cm 17.5 inches

Depth 36.83 cm 14.5 inches

Height 4.44 cm 1.75 inches

Weight 6.9 kg 15 lbs

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3960 Service Delivery Switch 13-3

The chassis is designed so that the power cabling is located on the rear of the
chassis. While all the interface cabling is located on the faceplate of the
chassis.

Note: To provide sufficient clearance for cabling, Ciena recommends that


an additional 7.62 cm (3 inches) of space be available to the front and rear
of the chassis. This clearance also assists with providing proper airflow for
thermal management.

Note: This unit has been designed and tested for installation in areas
prone to earthquakes (zone 4). To ensure proper operation it must be
installed in a proper frame.

Mounting
The following mounting brackets are available:
19-inch frame (this bracket is part of the 3960 kit)
23-inch frame
ETSI frame
Wallmount
There are three threaded holes on the side of the chassis. You attach the
mounting brackets using two of the three holes. The 3960 can be mounted in
either front or mid-mount position.

The orientation of the bracket, and the choice of mounting holes used, dictates
the final placement of the unit within the frame. The following placement
options are available:
Front Mount (using the front two holes) unit is flush with the front of the
frame
Front Mount (using the back two holes) unit is 46 mm (1.8 inches) in
front of the frame
Mid-mount (using the front two holes) unit is 81 mm (3.2 inches) in front
of the frame
Mid-mount (using the back two holes unit is 127 mm (5 inches) in front
of the frame

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
13-4 3960 Service Delivery Switch

Figure 13-2
Side of 3960 with Mounting Bracket Installation Options

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3960 Service Delivery Switch 13-5

Power Options
The 3960 has redundant power supplies which are accessed from the rear of
the chassis. The power supplies are available in both AC and DC. Because
the power to the unit is redundant, the power supplies are hot swappable and
field replaceable. During power supply replacement, the remaining power
supply will compensate to maintain uninterrupted system operation.

Table 13-3 provides a summary of the available power options.

Table 13-3
3960 Power Supply Options

Module Part number Power range Power usage Breaker

AC Power Supply 170-0100-901 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 171 Watts 15 Amps
3.0 - 2.4 A

DC Power Supply 170-0101-901 -48 to 60 VDC, 4.0 A 173 Watts 5 Amps

Note: When two power supplies are installed, use power supplies of the same type. Do not combine
AC and DC power supplies in the same installation. This is an untested configuration and is not
supported.
Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local
and national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose
and meet the relevant electrical codes.

When only one power supply is to be installed, it should be located in the bay
labelled PS A. When facing the back of the unit, PS A will be the left bay. See
Figure 13-3 on page 13-6. The second power supply bay must be covered
with a filler plate. The filler plate is necessary for safety and to ensure proper
airflow within the 3960.

When two power supplies are installed, the power supplies provide system
power simultaneously (load sharing).

WARNING
In configurations with two AC power supplies, each power
supply must be connected to a separate input circuit.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
13-6 3960 Service Delivery Switch

Figure 13-3
Rear of 3960

DC Power Supply
The connections to the DC mains and ground are made using a terminal block
available on each power supply. These connections are accessible on the rear
of the 3960 chassis. See Figure 13-3 on page 13-6.

The DC power cord is customer supplied and should be a minimum 18 gauge


wire. You will need to install fork terminal spade lugs on the power cord to
ensure a proper connection with the terminal block of the power supply. Table
13-1 contains a summary of the recommended locking fork terminal lugs.

Table 13-4
3960 DC Lug Summary

Wire Size Stud Maximum Lug Recommended Lug


Width

18 AWG #8 0.35 Panduit PV14-8LF-C (18-14 AWG)

Panduit PV18-8LF-CY (22-18 AWG)

Panduit PV18-8FF-CY (22-16 AWG)

Note: Use one of these recommended lugs or a close equivalent. If a ring lug is used, you will need to
remove and reinstall the screw. Take care not to lose the screw during this process.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3960 Service Delivery Switch 13-7

Power Status LEDs


The status of the power supplies is visible on the faceplate of the 3960. There
are three LEDs relating to power status:
PS A
PS B
POWER
The details of these LEDs is provided in 3960 Hardware Installation and Start-
up Manual (009-3231-001).

Note: The system cannot distinguish between a faulty and an unpowered


supply. As a result, if redundant power supplies are installed, but only one
supply is connected to a power source, the unpowered supply will cause
the system to report an alarm state. This alarm will be cleared when the
power supply is properly initialized.

Power Supply Fan


Each power supply includes a built-in fan to ensure adequate cooling of the
power supply. These fans are separate from the fans built-into the chassis. To
maintain adequate cooling, the power supply and system fans need to be kept
clear of obstructions.

Power Supply Failure


If the power supply fan should fail or another problem occurs with the power
supply, an alarm is raised and an SNMP trap is sent. If the power supply has
been disabled, an LED indication will also occur showing the defective power
supply is off. After a problem has been identified the power supply should be
immediately replaced. See 3960 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual
(009-3231-001) for the procedures to remove a power supply and install a
new unit.

Power Cord
For each 3960 device with redundant power supplies you will need two power
cords. The exact specifications of the cord required will vary depending on:
AC or DC power supply
local power codes for example, the configuration of the plug that is
attached to the power source will vary for each region around the world.
You need to obtain the correct power cord to meet your local
requirements.

WARNING
All AC power cords must meet the requirements of the local
and national electric codes prior to installation.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
13-8 3960 Service Delivery Switch

Ciena offers the following AC power cables for the 3960:


AC Power Cord, IEC C13, Europe
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, North America
AC Power Cord, IEC C13 with Ferrite, North America (for use in Class B
applications)
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, United Kingdom
AC Power Cord, C13, Universal
Dying Gasp
The 3960 supports dying gasp functionality. In the event of a power failure, the
3960 sends a dying gasp notification to the network. The notification also
contains a syslog entry (if syslog is enabled).

Note: When the system is powered by redundant power supplies, a dying


gasp message will only be sent if both power supplies lose power.

Possible causes of a dying gasp signal include:


power failure in the power source
disconnection of the AC or DC power source
Environmental Control
The 3960 is designed for interior, non-hardened installations and supports the
following environmental range:
0C to +50C operating ambient temperature up to an altitude of 3000 m
-40C to +70C storage temperature
5% to 95% non-condensing humidity
Note: For installations between 3000 and 4000 m the maximum operating
ambient temperature is +40C.

Extreme Temperature Conditions


In accordance with NEBS level 3 specifications, the 3960 is capable of
operating for short periods of time (not more than 96 consecutive hours and a
total of not more than 15 days in 1 year) at -5 C to +55C.

The 3960 has internal temperature sensors that monitor the temperature
within the unit. The software supports alarms, traps and logs at user
configurable temperature thresholds.

When temperatures exceed the maximum operating temperature, an


automatic over temperature shutdown is initiated to protect the 3960 from
damage. When the temperature returns to the supported operating
temperature range, the unit will automatically restart and resume service.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3960 Service Delivery Switch 13-9

Fans and Airflow


The 3960 has three fans to provide adequate air flow. The fans draw air from
the front of the unit and exhaust out the rear. The 7.62 cm (3 inch) installation
clearance at the front and back of the unit assists with air flow by ensuring that
the vents of the unit are not blocked.

When only one power supply is installed in the 3960, the second power supply
bay must be covered with a filler plate. The filler plate is necessary to ensure
proper airflow within the 3960. The unit is initially supplied with a filler plate. If
it is misplaced, a replacement can be ordered from Ciena.

In addition, the AC and DC power supplies have built-in fans to ensure


adequate cooling of the power supply. To maintain adequate cooling, the
power supply and system fans need to be kept clear of obstructions.

Fan Failure
If a fan failure occurs, an alarm is raised and an SNMP trap is sent. When a
fan fails in the 3960, then all three fans in the unit should be replaced.
Replacing the fans is a service impacting repair since the unit must be taken
completely offline and returned to Ciena for repair.

Grounding
The 3960 is connected to ground at the power supplies and the chassis.

Power supply grounding


The safety ground connection is provided by the AC power cord or by the
grounding terminal on the DC power supply. Further details are provided in
3960 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3231-001).

WARNING
The AC version relies on the AC power cord for the Safety
Ground. The outlet providing power to the 3960 must meet the
Local and National Safety codes.

WARNING
The DC version relies on the connector at the back of the
power supply to provide Safety Ground. This grounding
connection must be properly attached when the 3960 is
installed.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
13-10 3960 Service Delivery Switch

Supplemental ground
There are two holes and screws located on the left side of the back of the
chassis for connecting a grounding lug to the chassis. See 3960 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3231-001) for a procedure.

The grounding screws are provided and are located on the far left of the rear
of the chassis. See Figure 13-3 on page 13-6 for the location of the grounding
screws.

You are required to provide the grounding lug and grounding wire. The
following description indicates the required specifications:
#6 AWG (minimum) wire
2 hole lug @ 5/8 centers and with hole size for #10 screw
The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines, and the grounding procedures used by your
company.

The DC resistance between the chassis and the supplemental ground source
should be verified to be less than 25 milliohms.

Resets
The 3960 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is located to the
left of the management port on the far right of the chassis. Figure 13-4 shows
the location of the reset button.

Figure 13-4
Location of 3960 Reset Button

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3960 Service Delivery Switch 13-11

There are two different types of resets available:


Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than three seconds. A quick reset reboots the system and retains the
current configuration.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for three
seconds or more continuously. A hard reset erases the current
configuration and restores the unit to the factory default settings. See
Default configuration overview on page 18-1 for more information about
the factory default settings.
Note: It is also possible to initiate soft resets of the system through the
local console port, local management port, or the management VLAN.
Instructions for initiating a soft reset are included in the 39XX/51XX
Command Reference (009-3220-010).

Default Configuration
If the 3960 does not have an operational configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
Packet Networking portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview
on page 18-1. See that chapter for additional information.

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 3960 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit. With
the exception of the EIA-232 Console port, all the interfaces have integrated
LEDs which provide status information for the port. Figure 13-1 on page 13-2
shows the faceplate of the unit and identifies the locations of the different
ports.

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 3960 including:
10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
10/100/1000 Mbps Ports
Local Management Port
Console Port
10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The 3960 has four 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports which can be configured as either
NNI or UNI ports. Two of the 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports support enhanced
features. That functionality is controlled by the software provisioning and is not
described in this manual. For provisioning information see 39XX/51XX
Configuration (009-3220-008)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
13-12 3960 Service Delivery Switch

The 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports use XFP optical transceivers. Compliant optics
can be plugged in to change the external interface of the port, thus providing
a mix of possible distances and media types. These ports also include
integrated status LEDs. The XFPs are hot-swappable.

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported optics is


documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).

10/100/1000 Mbps Ports


The 3960 supports eight combo Gigabit Ethernet UNI subscriber ports. Each
port is available as either:
an RJ-45 copper port supporting 10/100/1000 Mbps operation with auto-
negotiation of speed and duplex as well as auto-MDIX. These RJ-45 ports
are GR-1089 Type 4 ports and are intended for indoor use only. These
ports are fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard.
an SFP port supporting both 100/1000 Mbps operation. The SFPs are hot-
swappable. These ports operate in full duplex mode, and conform to the
IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet standard.
The ports are automatically activated when an RJ-45 cable or and SFP
transceiver is plugged into the port. When both an RJ-45 and an SFP
transceiver are installed, the SFP will become the active port. If the SFP is
removed, the RJ-45 becomes active.

Both the RJ-45 and SFP ports also include integrated status LEDs.

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported optics is


documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).
Local Management Port
The 3960 includes one 10/100/1000 Mbps port for out-of-band management.
This port is located on the right of the faceplate and is labeled MGMT. This
port uses an RJ-45 connector and is fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3z
Gigabit Ethernet standard.

Ciena requires the use of a Cat 5 STP cable or better for the Management
port. The cable shield must be terminated at both ends. This port is classified
as intra-building only.

The management port uses auto-MDIX to negotiate connection speed and


this port can be used to attach a PC directly to the device, or it can be
connected to the network for management. A straight through or a crossover
cable can be used to connect to this port. This port also includes integrated
status LEDs. This port is intended for indoor use only.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
3960 Service Delivery Switch 13-13

Console Port
The 3960 includes one external serial console port for EIA-232
communication. This port is located on the right of the faceplate and is labeled
EIA-232 Console. The console port can be used to attach a terminal or a PC
to the device for out-of-band management.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the Packet
Networking portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1.
See that chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
13-14 3960 Service Delivery Switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
14-1

5140 Service Aggregation Switch 14-

Cienas 5140 is an Ethernet access system that cost-effectively delivers


sophisticated business, transport, and residential services via fiber or copper
connections. The 5140 features a high-capacity switching fabric with 24 GbE
ports in a compact (2RU) form factor that allows front access to power and all
system interfaces. The 5140 has an extended temperature range (-40 to
+65C) and a robust physical design that supports deployment in a wide
variety of unconditioned environments, including GR-487 and ETSI-compliant
outdoor cabinets. Because the 5140 provides both SFP and RJ-45 connectors
for each of its 24 GbE interface ports, the switch can support service
aggregation, transport, and demarcation applications in a wide variety of
network topologies, including fiber and microwave rings, point-to-point fiber,
microwave mesh, fiber or copper to subscriber, MTU/MDU/FTTx, and more.

Hardware Overview
The 5140 supports up to 20 User-to-Network Interface (UNI) connections and
4 Network-to-Network Interface (NNI)/UNI connections with combo SFP/RJ-
45 ports. These combo ports can operate at 100 Mbps/1000 Mbps for the
SFPs and 10/100/1000 Mbps for the RJ-45 connectors. All uplink ports can be
active at a single time. One 10/100/1000 Mbps port is also included for local
management.

The product is designed so that all connections (ground, power, and the user
and management interfaces) are located on the front of the chassis. Table
14-1 on page 14-2 provides a quick overview of the interfaces available on the
5140. Power connections are also of the device.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
14-2 5140 Service Aggregation Switch

Table 14-1
5140 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Ports Description

NNI/UNI 4 100M/Gigabit combo RJ-45/SFP ports.

UNI 20 100M/Gigabit combo RJ-45/SFP ports.

Console 1 Serial EIA-232 (DB-9) port for out-of-band management.

Management 1 10/100/1000 copper port (RJ-45) for out-of-band management

Note: All ports can be active at the same time.


Note: Only Ciena approved optics can be used with the 5140. The SFP summary and orderable part
numbers are contained in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).

On the 5140, the Status LEDs for the 10/100/1000BASE-TX ports are
integrated into each port. The 100/1000 Mbps SFP ports share these same
status LEDs. Status LEDs for the 10/100/1000BASE-TX management port
are also integrated into the port itself. See Figure 14-1 for more information.

Figure 14-1
5140 Front View

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5140 Service Aggregation Switch 14-3

Chassis Size and Weight


The chassis of the 5140 occupies only 2 rack units (RU) of a standard 19-inch
equipment rack, allowing up to 21 devices to share a single frame.

Table 14-2 provides a summary of the system dimensions.

Table 14-2
5140 Chassis Size and Weight

Attribute Value (Metric) Value (Imperial)

Width 44.45 cm 17.5 inches

Depth 26.67 cm 10.5 inches

Height 8.89 cm 3.5 inches

Weight 7.7 kg 17 lbs

The chassis is designed so that all the cabling is located on the faceplate of
the chassis.

Note: To provide sufficient clearance for cabling, Ciena recommends that


an additional 7.62 cm (3 inches) of space be available to the front of the
chassis. This clearance also assists with providing proper airflow for
thermal management.

Mounting
The following mounting brackets are available:
19-inch frame (this bracket is part of the 5140 kit)
23-inch frame
Wallmount
There are threaded holes on the side of the chassis used for attaching the
mounting brackets. The 5140 can be mounted in either front or mid-mount
position.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
14-4 5140 Service Aggregation Switch

Power Options
The 5140 has dual DC feeds and a single built-in DC power supply. Table 14-3
provides a summary of the available power options.

Table 14-3
5140 Power Supply Options

Module Part number Power range Breaker

5140 with integrated DC Power 170-5140-900 -20 to -56.7 VDC, drawing 4.0/1.53 Amps 6 Amps

Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local
and national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose
and meet the relevant electrical codes.

Connecting DC power to the 5140 chassis requires the following items (not
supplied):
Two cable lugs per power source (4 total if 2 power sources are used) for
connecting the input wires to the terminal block on the chassis (standard
eyelet connectors are suggested). The 5140 uses a M3 screw and
accepts a maximum terminal lug width of 0.25. The recommended ring
terminal lug is Panduit PV14-4R.
Two 14 AWG stranded wires per power source (4 total if 2 power sources
are used). A tray cable is required to connect the power source if the
chassis is powered by centralized DC power. The tray cable must be a UL
listed Type TC tray cable and rated at 600 V and 90C, with three
conductors, minimum 14 AWG.
Note: The 5140 must be properly connected to a ground source before
powering on the chassis.

Environmental Control
The 5140 utilizes a field replaceable fan tray to provide a cooling air flow
across the internal components. Replacement fan trays can be ordered
through Ciena customer support. The unit can provide adequate cooling even
when one of the fans has failed. If a fan does fail, an alarm/SNMP trap is
generated so that the fan try can be replaced in the next maintenance window.
To ensure that the fan assembly can provide adequate cooling, always
provide a minimum of 3 inches (8 cm) of clearance on the front and back of
the chassis.

The 5140 implements an automatic over-temperature shutdown to protect


electronic components from damage. It will automatically restart when the
ambient temperature returns within the supported operating range.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5140 Service Aggregation Switch 14-5

Fan Failure
If a fan failure occurs, an alarm is raised and an SNMP trap is sent. When a
fan fails in the 5140, the entire fan tray unit should be replaced. The fan
module in the 5140 is fully hot-swappable, however the unit should not be
operated for more than 15 minutes without a functional fan tray installed. This
is for a system that is at the maximum operating temperature (ambient +65C).
Refer to 5140 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3232-001) for
instructions on replacing the fan tray.

Grounding
Two holes, located on the left side of the front of the chassis are provided for
connecting a grounding lug to the chassis (see Figure 14-2). Further details
are provided in 5140 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3232-
001).

Figure 14-2
5140 Grounding Location

Grounding screws are provided, however the customer is required to provide


the grounding lug and grounding wire, according to the following
specifications:
#6 AWG (minimum) wire
2 hole lug @ 5/8 centers and with hole size for #10-32 or 1/4 screw (use
UL listed two hole lug Thomas and Betts part number 256-31426-9 or an
equivalent)
The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines and the grounding procedures used by your
company. The DC resistance between the chassis and the supplemental
ground source should be verified to be less than 25 milliohms.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
14-6 5140 Service Aggregation Switch

Resets
The 5140 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is located to the
left of the management port on the far right of the chassis. Figure 14-3 shows
the location of the reset button.

Figure 14-3
Location of 5140 Reset Button

The reset button can be used to perform one of the following functions:
Quick reset pushing the reset button for less than 2 seconds will reboot
the device retaining its current configuration.
Hard reset pushing and holding down the reset button for more than 2
seconds will reset the device, restoring it to the factory default settings.

WARNING
A system reset should ONLY be performed when all other
troubleshooting efforts have failed to resolve the problem.
Pressing the Reset button resets the entire system. Flash
memory, including application and configuration data, are
erased. The device reverts to the factory default settings.

Default Configuration
If the device does not have an operation configuration, the default
configuration is utilized. The default configuration for the products in the
Packet Networking portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview
on page 18-1. See that chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5140 Service Aggregation Switch 14-7

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 5140 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit. With
the exception of the EIA-232 Console port, all the interfaces have integrated
LEDs which provide status information for the port. Figure 14-1 on page 14-2
shows the faceplate of the unit and identifies the locations of the different
ports.

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 3960 including:
NNI/UNI Ports (4)
UNI Ports (20)
Local Management Port
Console Port
NNI/UNI Ports (4)
The 5140 provides 4 combo Gigabit Ethernet NNI uplink ports that can also
function as UNI subscriber ports. These ports are located on the left side of
the unit and are numbered as ports 21-24 from left to right.

These ports can be either 100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X or 10/100/1000BASE-


TX Ethernet ports. The combo ports provide connectivity using either a small
form factor, pluggable (SFP) optic or an RJ-45 connector. By default, if an SFP
is inserted and there is a cable connected to the RJ-45 connector for the same
port, the SFP will be active and the RJ-45 disabled. These ports operate only
in full duplex mode, are autonegotiating and auto MDIX, and conform to the
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standards. The document Packet Networking
Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602) lists the SFPs supported for this
product. The SFPs are hot-swappable, allowing compliant optics to be
plugged in to change the external interface of the port, thus providing a mix of
possible distances and media types.

UNI Ports (20)


The 5140 also includes 20 UNI ports, for connecting subscriber devices and
other downstream equipment. These combo ports are numbered 1-20 from
left to right and are located between the NNI/UNI port number 24 and the
Console and MGMT ports.

These ports can be either 100BASE-FX/1000BASE-X or 10/100/1000BASE-


TX Ethernet ports. These combo ports provide connectivity using either a
small form factor, pluggable (SFP) optic or an RJ-45 connector. By default, if
an SFP is inserted and there is a cable connected to the RJ-45 connector for
the same port, the SFP will be active and the RJ-45 disabled. These ports
operate only in full duplex mode, are autonegotiating and auto MDIX, and
conform to the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standards. The document Packet
Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602) lists the SFPs supported

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
14-8 5140 Service Aggregation Switch

for this product. The SFPs are hot-swappable, allowing compliant optics to be
plugged in to change the external interface of the port, thus providing a mix of
possible distances and media types.

Local Management Port


One 10/100/1000BASE-TX, autonegotiating, auto MDIX port (labeled as
MGMT) is provided for out-of-band management. This port uses an RJ-45
connector and is fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standards. The
management port can be used to attach a PC directly to the device or it can
be connected to the network for management.

Ciena requires the use of a Cat 5 STP cable or better for the Management
port. The cable shield must be terminated at both ends. This port is classified
as intra-building only.

This port also includes integrated status LEDs. The RJ-45 ports have two
integrated LEDs, located at the top of the port, that indicate port status.

Console Port
The 5140 also includes an external serial console port on the front of the
device, labeled Console. The console port can be used to attach a terminal or
a PC to the device, for local craft access.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the Packet
Networking portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1.
See that chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
15-1

5142 Service Aggregation Switch 15-

The 5142 provides premium 1/10 Gbps Carrier Ethernet Service Aggregation
capability, at a low cost. The 5142 requires only 1 RU of space and is easy to
install and deploy. In addition, the 5142 supports a range of SFP and SFP+
optics, providing port level flexibility to the available interfaces.

This powerful system is ideal for customers looking to evolve beyond 1 GbE
aggregation, but who are looking for a lower density device for their site.

An overview of the chassis is provided in Figure 15-1.

Figure 15-1
Front view of the 5142
MGMT 10/100/1000

SYNC ALARMS Power Modules

100M/1G
1G/10G Console
10MHz 1PPS

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
15-2 5142 Service Aggregation Switch

Hardware Overview
The product is designed so that all the user and management interfaces are
located on the front of the chassis. Table 15-1 provides a quick overview of
the interfaces available on the 5142 and Figure 15-1 on page 15-1 provides a
view of the front of the 5142.

Table 15-1
5142 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Description


Ports

NNI/UNI 4 1/10 Gigabit Ethernet ports with SFP/SFP+ connectors. These are ports
21 to 24.
Copper or optical SFP/SFP+ can be installed in any of these 24 ports.
Copper SGMII transceivers can operate at 10/100/1000M speeds.

UNI 20 1 Gigabit Ethernet ports with SFP connectors. These are ports 1 to 20.
These ports can operate ate 100 or 1000M speeds.
Copper or optical SFP can be installed in any of these 20 ports. Copper
SGMII transceivers can operate at 10/100/1000M speeds.

Management 1 10/100/1000 Mbps copper port (RJ-45) for out-of-band management

Console 1 Serial EIA-561 (RJ-45) port

Sync 1 BITS-In or BITS-Out, 1PPS and Time of Day (future).

1 PPS 1 1 PPS external synchronization port and Time of Day (future).

10 MHz 1 10 MHz external synchronization port.

Alarm 1 26-pin D-sub plug with custom pin-out

Note: Only Ciena approved optics can be used with the 5142. The SFP/SFP+ summary and orderable
part numbers are contained in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).
Note: For additional information about the external timing ports see External timing on page 20-1.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5142 Service Aggregation Switch 15-3

Chassis Size and Weight


The chassis of the 5142 occupies 1 rack unit (RU) of a standard 19-inch
equipment frame, allowing up to 42 devices in a single frame. The chassis has
the following dimensions:
Width: 44.4 cm (17.5 inches)
Depth: 25.4 cm (10 inches)
Height: 4.4 cm (1.75 inches)
The chassis is designed so that the power cabling and all interface cabling is
located on the faceplate of the chassis. The grounding cable is installed on the
rear of the chassis. For more information see Grounding on page 15-8.

Additional Clearances
To provide sufficient clearance for cabling and airflow, Ciena recommends the
following clearances:
Rear of chassis: 6.4 cm (2.5 inches)
Front of chassis: 7.6 cm (3 inches)
Note: The 5142 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-
001) also draws air through intake vents on the right side of the chassis.
When the unit is installed you should ensure that this area is not
obstructed by cables running along the side of the frame.

System Weight
Before you start, ensure that the frame or mounting surface (wallmount
installations) is capable of supporting the weight of the system. Table 15-2
provides a list of the components that can be used in a system and their
weight.

Table 15-2
5142 Component Weight Summary

Component Weight (lbs) Weight (kg)

5142 without power supplies 9.28 4.21

AC power supply (up to 2 of these are used) 1.69 0.77

DC power supply (up to 2 of these are used) 1.8 0.82

5142 with 2 AC power supplies 12.68 5.75

5142 with 2 DC power supplies 12.9 5.85

Note: There will also be a small amount of incremental weight for SFPs and cabling.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
15-4 5142 Service Aggregation Switch

Mounting
The following mounting brackets are available:
19-inch frame (this bracket is part of the 5142 kit)
23-inch frame
Wall Mount
The brackets are attached to the chassis using 3 (wallmount bracket) or 4
(frame mount brackets) screw holes.

The frame mount brackets are also compatible with cable support brackets
that are designed to keep cables out of adjacent equipment space. See 5142
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-001) for more
information.

The wallmount bracket allows the chassis to be mounted on a wall. The


wallmount bracket does not contain any cable management features. See
5142 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-001) for more
information.

Note: For installations using the wallmount bracket, the hardware


required to attach the mounting bracket to the wall is Customer supplied.
In addition, the reinforced mounting surface should be capable of
supporting approximately 100 pounds. Please ensure that the hardware
used includes the proper fasteners/anchors required to support the weight
of the unit.

Power Options
The 5142 has redundant power supplies which are accessed from the front of
the chassis. Both AC and DC power supplies are available. The system is also
capable of operation with a single power supply, however redundant power
supplies are recommended. When a single power supply is used, the empty
power supply bay must be covered with a filler plate. A filler plate is provided
with the base system.

Because the power unit is redundant, the power supplies are hot swappable
and field replaceable. With both power supplies installed, the power supplies
provide system power simultaneously (load sharing). During power supply
replacement, the remaining power supply will compensate to maintain
uninterrupted system operation. If one of the power supply units fails, it should
be replaced as soon as possible.

Note: The system can remain on, however, the power module being
removed and installed must be unpowered. In some configurations,
replacing a power supply can be a service impacting procedure.

Note: The 3930, 3932 and 5142 all use the same power supplies.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5142 Service Aggregation Switch 15-5

Table 15-3 provides a summary of the available power options.

Table 15-3
5142 Power Supply Overview

Module Part Number Power Range Breaker

AC power supply 170-0014-900 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 Amp


2.2 Amps max

DC power supply 170-0013-900 20V DC to 60V DC, 10 Amps (24V or 36V)


10 Amps max or 5 Amps (48V)

Note: When two power supplies are installed, use power supplies of the same type. Do not combine
AC and DC power supplies in the same installation. This is an untested configuration and is not
supported.
Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local and
national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose and
meet the relevant electrical codes.

DC Power Supply
The DC power supply module is a wide range DC power module and accepts
a range of input voltages (see Table 15-3) including -/+48 V DC, -/+36 V DC
or -/+24 V DC.

The connections to the DC mains and ground are made using a terminal block
available on the faceplate of each power supply.

The DC power cord should be a 14 AWG - 16 AWG wire. You will also need
to install fork terminal spade lugs on the power cord wires to ensure a proper
connection with the terminal block of the power supply. Table 15-4 contains a
summary of the recommended locking fork terminal lugs.

Table 15-4
5142 DC Lug Summary

Wire Size Stud Maximum Lug Width Recommended Lug

14 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6FF-C (16-14 AWG)

14 and 16 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6LF-C (18-14 AWG)

Panduit PV14-6LFW-C (18-14 AWG)

Note: Use one of these recommended lugs or a close equivalent. If a ring lug is used, you will need to
remove and reinstall the screw. Take care not to lose the screw during this process.

Table 15-3 summarizes the minimum breaker values for 24 V, 36 V and 48 V


input installations.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
15-6 5142 Service Aggregation Switch

In order to successfully replace the power supply while the unit is operating,
the DC power supplies must be powered off separate breakers. This allows
you to turn off power feeding the power supply that is being replaced. While
the second independent circuit remains on, and powers the unit during the
replacement process. As a result, Ciena recommends that each DC power
supply be connected to a separate breaker.

AC Power Supply
The AC power supply module is a wide range AC power module and accepts
input voltages of 100 V to 240 V AC nominal. The AC power cord connects to
the faceplate of the module using a standard plug.

WARNING

As per GR-1089 Section 4.12 an external Surge Protective


Device (SPD) is required at the AC input of the 5142.

The faceplate is equipped with a bail lock mechanism to assist with power
cord retention. The bail lock snaps over the hood of the power cord and
prevents it from becoming accidentally unplugged when the power cord is
pulled. To remove the power cord from the AC power supply you need to
remove the bail lock before tugging on the power cable.

For each 5142 device with redundant power supplies you will need two power
cords. The exact specifications of the cord required will vary depending on:
AC or DC power supply
local power codes for example, the configuration of the plug that is
attached to the power source will vary for each region around the world.
You need to obtain the correct power cord to meet your local
requirements.

WARNING

All AC power cords must meet the requirements of the local


and national electric codes prior to installation.

Ciena offers the following AC power cables for the 5142:


AC Power Cord, IEC C13, Europe
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, North America
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, United Kingdom
AC Power Cord, C13, Universal

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5142 Service Aggregation Switch 15-7

Power Status LEDs


The status of the power supplies is visible on the faceplate of the 5142 through
the INPUT and OUTPUT LEDs on each power supply. See the 5142
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-001) for a detailed
description of the LED indications.

Power Supply Failure


If a problem occurs with the power supply, an alarm is raised and an SNMP
trap is sent. If the power supply has been disabled, an LED indication will also
occur showing the defective power supply is off.

After a problem has been identified, the power supply should be replaced. See
5142 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-001) for the
procedures to remove a power supply and install a new unit.

Dying Gasp
The 5142 supports dying gasp functionality. In the event of a power failure, the
5142 sends a dying gasp notification to the network. The notification also
contains a syslog entry (if syslog is enabled).

Note: When the system is powered by redundant power supplies, a dying


gasp message will only be sent if both power supplies lose power.

Environmental Control
The 5142 is designed for deployment in Outdoor Street Cabinets, huts and
other unconditioned locations and supports the following environmental
range:
-40C to +65C (-40F to 149F) operating ambient temperature up to an
altitude of 4000 m
-40C to +70C storage temperature
5% to 95% non-condensing humidity
Extreme Temperature Conditions
The 5142 has internal temperature sensors that monitor the temperature
within the unit. The software supports alarms, traps and logs at user
configurable temperature thresholds.

When temperatures exceed the maximum operating temperature, an


automatic over temperature shutdown is initiated to protect the 5142 from
damage. The system is powered down but the fans remain on to assist with
cooling the unit. The thermal switch continues to monitor the temperature, and
when the temperature returns to the supported operating temperature range,
the unit will automatically restart and resume service.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
15-8 5142 Service Aggregation Switch

Fans and Airflow


The 5142 chassis is equipped with three fans to provide adequate airflow. The
fans draw air from the front and right side of the unit, and exhaust out the rear.
The 7.6 cm (3 inch) installation clearance at the front and 6.4 cm (2.5 inch)
clearance at the back of the unit assists with air flow by ensuring that the vents
of the unit are not blocked. You should also ensure that the air vents on the
right side of the chassis are not obstructed by cables running along the side
of the frame.

When only one power supply is installed in the 5142, the second power supply
bay must be covered with a filler plate. The filler plate is necessary to ensure
proper airflow within the 5142. The unit is initially supplied with a filler plate. If
it is misplaced, a replacement can be ordered from Ciena.

Fan Failure
If a fan failure occurs, an alarm is raised and an SNMP trap is sent. When a
single fan fails in the 5142 the platform continues to function normally and
meet all specifications. However, the unit should be scheduled for servicing by
Ciena. Replacing the fans is a service impacting repair since the unit must be
taken completely offline and returned to Ciena for repair. If a unit is returned
for a fan failure, all three fans in the system are replaced by Ciena.

Grounding
The 5142 is connected to ground at the power supplies and the chassis.

Note: The Battery Return lead is considered DC-I (isolated from frame
ground) as described in GR-1089-Core, Issue 6.

Power Supply Grounding


The safety ground connection is provided by the AC power cord or by the
grounding terminal on the DC power supply. Further details are provided in
5142 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-001).

WARNING

The AC version relies on the AC power cord for Safety ground.


The outlet providing power to the 5142 must meet the Local
and National Safety codes.

WARNING

The DC version relies on the connector at the front of the


power supply to provide Safety Ground. This grounding
connection must be properly attached when the 5142 is
installed.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5142 Service Aggregation Switch 15-9

Supplemental Ground
A supplemental ground location is provided on the back of the chassis. This
ground location will support a 2-hole lug.

The grounding screws are provided and are located on the rear of the chassis
in the center. See Figure 15-2 on page 15-9 for the location of the grounding
screws.

The grounding lug and grounding wire are customer supplied. The following
description indicates the required specifications:
#6 AWG (minimum) wire
2 hole lug @ 5/8 centers and with hole size for #10 or 1/4 screw
The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines, and the grounding procedures used by your
company.

The DC resistance between the chassis and the supplemental ground source
should be verified to be less than 100 milliohms.

Figure 15-2
Rear of the 5142 Chassis and Rear Grounding Screw Location

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
15-10 5142 Service Aggregation Switch

Resets
It is possible to initiate soft resets of the system through the local console port,
local management port, or the management VLAN. Instructions for initiating a
soft reset are included in the 39XX/51XX Command Reference (009-3220-
010). This is the recommended way to reset the system.

The 5142 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is located to the
left of the management port on the far right of the chassis. Figure 15-3 shows
the location of the reset button.

Figure 15-3
Location of the 5142 Reset Button

Reset Button

There are two different types of resets available:


Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than three seconds. A quick reset reboots the system with the current
saved configuration. When you press the reset button for less than 3
seconds, all the LEDs on the faceplate will be lit.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for three
seconds or more continuously. When you press the reset button for more
than 3 seconds, all the LEDs on the faceplate will be lit, then they will flash
to indicate that the hard reset has been initiated. A hard reset erases the
current configuration and restores the unit to the factory default settings.
See Default configuration overview on page 18-1 for more information
about the factory default settings.
Note: If the reset button is pressed when the system is unresponsive, an
additional logging behavior will be triggered. See Creating a State Dump
or Core Dump Log File on page 15-11 for more information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5142 Service Aggregation Switch 15-11

Note: Pressing the reset button will also result in an LED indication. The
LED behavior is described in 5142 Hardware Installation and Start-up
Manual (009-3206-001).

Creating a State Dump or Core Dump Log File


Two types of log files are available:
State dump log The state dump provides a summary of the current and
previous state of the system.
Core dump log The core dump provides a summary of the processes
that were running when the system became unresponsive.
The creation of these files is triggered by depressing the reset button (for
either a quick or hard reset) on 5142 systems.

The log file creation varies depending on the state of the system when the
reset button is depressed. One of the following scenarios will occur:
System was responsive when the reset button was depressed The
state dump file is generated before the system reboots. There will be
minimal delay (approximately 5 seconds) while the state dump file is
created and stored to the system memory. After the state dump file is
created the system will reboot.
System was unresponsive when the reset button was depressed
In this case a full core dump will be initiated, and then a state dump. There
will be a delay (up to 2 minutes) while the core dump file is created and
stored to system memory. Next the state dump file is created and stored
to system memory. After the both the core dump and state dump files are
created the system will reboot.
When the system reboots, you will be able to retrieve the state dump file and
core dump file (if it exists) from the system. The log files are stored in the
following locations:
State dump log files: /mnt/sysfs/log/push_button_state-dump
Note: If a state dump file already exists on the system, it will be renamed
push_button_state-dump.prev when the new file is created.

Core dump log files: /tmp/corefiles/


These files can be used to assist with troubleshooting the system.

Default Configuration
If the 5142 does not have an operational configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
Packet Networking portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview
on page 18-1. Please see that chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
15-12 5142 Service Aggregation Switch

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 5142 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit. With
the exception of the Console port and Alarm port, all the interfaces have
integrated LEDs which provide status information for the port. Figure 15-1 on
page 15-1shows the faceplate of the unit and identifies the locations of the
different ports.

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 5142 including:
1/10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
1 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
Local Management Port (10/100/1000)
Sync Port
1 PPS
10 MHz
Console Port (EIA-561)
External Alarm Inputs
1/10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The faceplate of the 5142 has 4 high-capacity ports. These are Ports 21 to 24,
and these ports are NNI capable. All ports support both SFP and SFP+
modules.

These ports are capable of operating at 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps (SFP+) speeds. If


SGMII copper transceivers are installed the port can operate at 10/100/1000M
speeds. The port characteristics are set by the capabilities of the SFPs that
are installed. The SFP ports conform to the IEEE 802.3ae 10-Gigabit Ethernet
standard and are hot-swappable.

These ports also include integrated status LEDs. See 5142 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-001) for more information.

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported SFP/SFP+ optics
is documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-
602). When the 5142 is installed in an outdoor application, extended
temperature optics are required.

1 Gigabit Ethernet Ports


The faceplate of the 5142 has 20 ports capable of operating at 100M or
1 Gbps. If SGMII copper transceivers are installed the port can operate at 10/
100/1000M speeds. These are Ports 1 to 20, and these ports are UNI capable.
All ports support SFP module.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5142 Service Aggregation Switch 15-13

The port characteristics are set by the capabilities of the SFPs that are
installed. The SFP ports conform to the IEEE 802.3ae 10-Gigabit Ethernet
standard and are hot-swappable.

These ports also include integrated status LEDs. See 5142 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-001) for more information.

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported SFP/SFP+ optics
is documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-
602). When the 5142 is installed in an outdoor application, extended
temperature optics are required.

Local Management Port (10/100/1000)


The 5142 includes one 10/100/1000 Mbps port for out-of-band management.
This port is located on the right of the faceplate and is labeled MGMT 10/100/
1000. This port uses an RJ-45 connector and is fully compliant with the IEEE
802.3u 1000Base-Tx Ethernet standard.

Ciena requires the use of a Cat 5 STP cable or better for the Management
port. The cable shield must be terminated at both ends. This port is classified
as intra-building only.

The management port can be used to attach a PC directly to the device, or it


can be connected to the network for management. The management port
uses auto-MDI/MDIX. A straight through (MDI) or a crossover cable (MDIX)
can be connected to this port. Connection speed and duplex are negotiated
with auto-negotiation.

This port also includes integrated status LEDs. See 5142 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3206-001) for more information.

Sync Port
The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled SYNC.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See Sync port on
page 20-3 for more information about this port.

1 PPS
The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled 1PPS.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See 1 PPS on page
20-6 for more information about this port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
15-14 5142 Service Aggregation Switch

10 MHz
The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled 10MHz.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See 10 MHz on page
20-7 for more information about this port.

Console Port (EIA-561)


The 5142 includes one serial port with RJ-45 connector for maintenance
purposes. This port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled
Console. The two LEDs present on the connector are unused.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the Packet
Networking portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1.
Please see that chapter for additional information.

External Alarm Inputs


The 5142 supports 16 external alarm inputs. The alarm connector is located
in the center/right section of the 5142 labeled ALARMS.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the Alarms chapter. See Alarm Custom Pin-out
(26-pin D-sub connector) on page 19-5 for more information about this port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
16-1

5150 Service Aggregation Switch 16-

Cienas 5150 is a high-density Ethernet aggregation switch that addresses the


scalability and cost of the metro network to enable profitable delivery of a wide
range of Ethernet services, including a wide range of Ethernet services,
including business connectivity (E-Access, E-Line, E-LAN, and E-Tree), Layer
2 access to IP services, mobile backhaul, consumer and enterprise triple play
backhaul, and public sector network services (utility smart grid, and private
health care networks).

The 5150 features industry-leading switching capacity and port density in a


compact (2RU) form factor. It supports forty-eight GbE ports and up to four
10GbE ports (optional). Additionally, the efficient architecture, extended
temperature range and compact packaging design enables the 5150 to be
deployed in a wide variety of physical environments, meaning that Ethernet
aggregation can deployed exactly where maximum efficiency of bandwidth
and valuable optical fiber resources may be achieved.

Ciena offers two 5150 variants, the original 5150 Sync (5150-900) and the
upgraded 5150 Packet Timing (5150-910). The 5150 Packet Timing provides
an upgraded Stratum 3E OCXO oscillator to provide 1588v2 Precision Time
Protocol (PTP) support.

Hardware Overview
The 5150 is a Service Aggregation Switch that provides both Gigabit Ethernet
and 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The base system provides 48 x 100/1000
Mbps Ethernet User Network Interface (UNI) subscriber ports with Small
Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) connectors.

You also have the option of installing 4 x 10 Gigabit Ethernet advanced


functionality ports with XFP connectors. The 10 Gigabit ports support both
Network to Network (NNI) and User Network Interface (UNI) provisioning.

The 10 Gigabit ports are added by installing 10 GbE Option Modules. Two
slots are available to install option modules and there are three different option
modules available. See 10 Gigabit Ethernet Pluggable Modules on page
16-5 for more information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
16-2 5150 Service Aggregation Switch

The 5150 is a 2 RU rack-mount fixed form factor, with space for two pluggable
2 x 10 Gigabit Option Modules. The redundant power supplies are hot
swappable and field replaceable and are accessed from the front of the
chassis, with Universal AC and wide-range DC power modules available. The
5150 relies on fans contained within the power supply. Because the power
supplies also contain the system cooling fans, the system must always have
two power supplies installed, except for maintenance events. A single power
supply configuration is not supported.

All ports, management interfaces, LEDs and power connections are


accessible from the front of the 5150 chassis.

Table 16-1 on page 16-2 provides a quick overview of the interfaces available
on the 5150.

Table 16-1
5150 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Ports Description

NNI 4 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports with XFP connectors. These ports are
added in increments of two by installing 10 GbE Option Modules.
The 10 Gigabit ports can be used as either NNI or UNI ports. Their
installation is optional. When these modules are not installed, a filler
plate is required over the empty slot.

UNI 48 100/1000 Mbps subscriber ports with SFP connectors. The SFPs
support both 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps speeds.
Ports 1 to 36 are UNI only. Ports 37 to 48 (bottom row) are NNI and
UNI capable. Copper or optical SFPs can be installed in any of
these 48 ports.

SYNC 1 BITS-In or BITS-Out. This port is optional.


Note: Available on the Standard with BITS option module only. See
10 Gigabit Ethernet Pluggable Modules on page 16-5 for more
information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5150 Service Aggregation Switch 16-3

Table 16-1
5150 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Ports Description

Console 1 Serial EIA-561 (RJ-45) port

Management 1 10/100/1000 copper port (RJ-45) for out-of-band management

Note: All ports can be active at the same time.


Note: Only Ciena approved SFPs and XFPs can be used with the 5150. For more information see
Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).
Note: Dying Gasp functionality is supported on NNI ports only. This functionality is available on all
four 10 Gigabit ports, and the following 1 Gigabit ports: Ports 37 to 48 (bottom row of the chassis).
Although the software allows the remaining 1 Gigabit ports (1-36) to be configured as NNI ports, this
configuration is not recommended since Dying Gasp is not supported. As a result, ports 1-36 are
considered UNI-only ports in the system.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
16-4 5150 Service Aggregation Switch

The front panel of the chassis also provides status LEDs for the 5150 unit, and
all the ports. See Figure 16-1 for more information.

Figure 16-1
5150 Front View

The SFP cages for the forty-eight 100/1000 Mbps ports are an integrated part
of the chassis. The four 10 Gigabit ports are located on optional pluggable
modules. Up to two modules can be installed, with each module providing two
10 Gigabit ports. If a BITS interface is needed, a 10 Gigabit option module with
BITS can be installed in one of these two slots. When these modules are not
installed, a filler plate is required over this installation location.

The front panel of the chassis also provides status LEDs for the 5150 unit, and
all the ports. See 5150 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3222-
001) for detailed information.

The power supplies are also accessed from the front of the unit. Two power
supplies are required. This is discussed further in Power Options on page
16-7.

Ground is connected via the power supply. A supplemental ground is also


available at the rear of the chassis. For more information see Grounding on
page 16-11.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5150 Service Aggregation Switch 16-5

10 Gigabit Ethernet Pluggable Modules


The 10 Gigabit Ethernet modules are optional modules that can be purchased
for the 5150. The modules are installed in the two slots near the center of the
5150. Table 16-2 provides a summary of the available modules.
Table 16-2
10 Gigabit Ethernet Pluggable Module Summary

Module Description Number per Notes


5150

Standard 2 x 10 GbE Dual XFP 1 or 2


(170-5101-900) Module

Extended Features 2 x 10 GbE Dual XFP 1 or 2 Hardware capable for a number of


(170-5100-900) Module with extended advanced features such as:
features PBB-TE tunneling and optimization
protocols
hardware acceleration for AT&T
TWAMP, 802.1ag CFM CCMs and
Y.1731 management and performance
measurement messages

Standard with BITS 2 x 10 GbE Dual XFP 1 The BITS interface can be configured to
(170-5102-900) Module with single BITS provide either BITS-IN or BITS-OUT.
interface Only one of these modules can be
installed in the 5150. Either slot can be
used.
This module requires SAOS release
6.10.1 as the minimum software
release.

All of the 10 Gigabit Modules provide two 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports with XFP
connectors. These option modules both support standard and synchronous
The 10 Gigabit Ethernet Pluggable Option modules are not hot swappable.
The system must be powered down to install or replace these modules.

When only one module is being installed, it can be installed in either slot.
Functionality is determined by the module type, and not the slot it is installed
in.

When you buy the 10 Gigabit Ethernet Pluggable Option module you will need
to order the XFPs separately. The list of supported XFPs is documented in
Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602). The XFPs that
are installed in this module are hot swappable.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
16-6 5150 Service Aggregation Switch

Chassis Size and Weight


The chassis of the 5150 occupies 2 rack units (RU) of a standard 19-inch
equipment frame, allowing up to 21 devices in a single frame. The chassis has
the following dimensions:
Width: 44.45 cm (17.5 inches)
Depth: 25.4 cm (10 inches)
Height: 8.9 cm (3.5 inches)
The chassis is designed so that the power cabling and all interface cabling is
located on the faceplate of the chassis. The grounding cable is installed on the
rear of the chassis. For more information see Grounding on page 16-11.

Additional Clearances
To provide sufficient clearance for cabling and airflow, Ciena recommends the
following clearances:
Rear of chassis: 6.4 cm (2.5 inches)
Front of chassis: 7.6 cm (3 inches)
System Weight
Before you start, ensure that the frame or mounting surface (wallmount
installations) is capable of supporting the weight of the system. Table 16-3
provides a list of the components that can be used in a system and their
weight.

Table 16-3
5150 Component Weight Summary

Component Weight (lbs) Weight (kg)

5150 without power supplies or pluggable 10 Gigabit Modules 16 7.25

Power supply (note that 2 of these are required) 3 1.36

10 Gigabit Modules (optional, up to 2 can be installed) 1 0.45

5150 with two power supplies and 2 pluggable 10 Gigabit Modules 24 10.9

Note: There will also be a small amount of incremental weight for SFPs/XFPs and cabling.

Mounting
The following mounting brackets are available:
19-inch frame (this bracket is included with the 5150)
23-inch frame
Wall Mount
The brackets are attached to the chassis using 3 (wall mount bracket) or 4
(frame mount brackets) screw holes.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5150 Service Aggregation Switch 16-7

The frame mount brackets are also compatible with sturdy cable support
brackets that are designed to assist with supporting the weight of the faceplate
cabling used with the system. The wall mount bracket allows the chassis to be
mounted on a wall.

Note: For installations using the wall mount bracket, the hardware
required to attach the mounting bracket to the wall is Customer supplied.
In addition, the reinforced mounting surface should be capable of
supporting approximately 100 pounds. Ensure that the hardware used
includes the proper fasteners/anchors required to support the weight of
the unit.

Power Options
The 5150 has redundant power supplies which are accessed from the front of
the chassis. Both AC and DC power supplies are available. You can install
either two AC or two DC supplies. A mix of AC and DC power supplies is not
supported. Table 16-4 provides a summary.

Table 16-4
5150 Power Supply Overview

Module Part Number Power Range Breaker

AC power supply 170-0100-902 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4 Amp (minimum)
4.0 Amps 15 Amp (typical)

DC power supply 170-0101-902 20V DC to 60V DC, 15.0 Amps 15 Amp

Note: When two power supplies are installed, use power supplies of the same type. Do not combine
AC and DC power supplies in the same installation. This is an untested configuration and is not
supported.
Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local
and national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose and
meet the relevant electrical codes.

The two power supply units contain integrated fans that are required to assist
with cooling the 5150. As a result, both power supply units are required to
provide adequate air flow in the chassis.

Because the power unit is redundant, the power supplies are hot swappable
and field replaceable. With both power supplies installed, the power supplies
provide system power simultaneously (load sharing). During power supply
replacement, the remaining power supply will compensate to maintain
uninterrupted system operation.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
16-8 5150 Service Aggregation Switch

In order to successfully replace the power supply while the unit is operating,
the DC power supplies must be powered off separate breakers. This allows
you to turn off power feeding the power supply that is being replaced. While
the second independent circuit remains on, and powers the unit during the
replacement process. As a result, Ciena recommends that each DC power
supply be connected to a separate breaker.

If one of the power supply units fails, it should be replaced as soon as


possible. In addition it should be noted that operating the 5150 with an empty
power supply bay for any length of time is not supported. Both power supplies
need to be installed and operational to properly cool the system.

AC Power Supply
The AC power supply module is a Universal input AC power module and
accepts input voltages of 85 V AC to 264 V AC, and 47 Hz to 63 Hz. The
breaker on the power input should be installed as per the National Electrical
Code guidelines, and a 15 Amp breaker should be sufficient.

Note: To meet the requirements of GR-1089 Section 4.12 the use of an


external Surge Protection Device is required.

The AC power cord connects to the faceplate of the module using a standard
plug. The faceplate is equipped with a bail lock mechanism to assist with
power cord retention. The bail lock snaps down over the hood of the power
cord and prevents it from becoming accidentally unplugged when the power
cord is pulled. To remove the power cord from the AC power supply you need
to remove the bail lock before tugging on the power cable.

For each AC power supply you will need one power cord. The exact
specifications of the cord required will vary depending on the local power
codes. For example, the configuration of the plug that is attached to the power
source will vary for each region around the world. You need to obtain the
correct power cord to meet your local requirements.

Ciena offers the following AC power cables for the 5150:


AC Power Cord, IEC C13, Europe
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, North America
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, United Kingdom
AC Power Cord, C13, Universal

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5150 Service Aggregation Switch 16-9

DC Power Supply
The DC power supply module is a wide range DC power module and accepts
input voltages of -/+48 V DC or -/+24 V DC.

The connections to the DC mains and ground are made using a terminal block
available on the faceplate of each power supply.

The DC power cord should be 14 AWG wire. You will also need to install fork
terminal spade lugs on the power cord wires to ensure a proper connection
with the terminal block of the power supply.

Table 16-5 contains a summary of the recommended locking fork terminal


lugs.

Table 16-5
5150 DC Lug Summary

Wire Size Stud Maximum Lug Width Recommended Lug

14 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6FF-C (16-14 AWG)

Panduit PV14-6LF-C (18-14 AWG)

Panduit PV14-6LFW-C (18-14 AWG)

Note: Use one of these recommended lugs or a close equivalent. If a ring lug is used, you will need to
remove and reinstall the screw. Take care not to lose the screw during this process.

For installations using 24 V input voltage, the recommended breaker value is


a minimum of 15 Amps. For systems using 48 V input voltage, the
recommended breaker value is a minimum of 7.5 Amps and a maximum of 15
Amps.

Power Status LEDs


The status of the power supplies is visible on the faceplate of the 5150 through
the PWR LED. See 5150 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-
3222-001) for a description of the LED indications.

Power Supply Fan


Each power supply includes two built-in fans to ensure adequate cooling of
the power supply and 5150. To maintain adequate cooling, the ventilation
holes on the chassis need to be kept clear of obstructions.

Power Supply Failure


If the power supply fan should fail or another problem occurs with the power
supply, an alarm is raised and an SNMP trap is sent. If the power supply has
been disabled, an LED indication will also occur showing the defective power
supply is off.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
16-10 5150 Service Aggregation Switch

In the event of a power supply failure, the fan in the inoperable power supply
will continue to function. These fans receive power from the system power
provided by the working power supply.

In the event of a fan failure, the 5150 will continue to operate within design
specifications for a short period of time. This is defined as a minimum of 96
hours at 65 degrees Celsius ambient temperature.

After a problem has been identified, the power supply should be replaced. See
5150 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3222-001) for the
procedures to remove a power supply and install a new unit.

Dying Gasp
The 5150 supports dying gasp functionality. In the event of a power failure, the
5150 sends a dying gasp notification to the network. The notification also
contains a syslog entry (if syslog is enabled).

Note: Dying Gasp functionality is supported on NNI ports only. This


functionality is available on all four 10 Gigabit ports, and the following
1 Gigabit ports: Ports 37 to 48 (bottom row of the chassis).

Note: When the system is powered by redundant power supplies, a dying


gasp message will only be sent if both power supplies lose power.

Possible causes of a dying gasp signal include:


power failure in the power source
disconnection of the DC power source
Environmental Control
The 5150 is designed for deployment in Outdoor Street Cabinets, huts and
other unconditioned locations and supports the following environmental
range:
-40C to +65C (-40F to 149F) operating ambient temperature up to an
altitude of 4000 m
-40C to +70C storage temperature
5% to 95% non-condensing humidity
Extreme Temperature Conditions
The 5150 has internal temperature sensors that monitor the temperature
within the unit. The software supports alarms, traps and logs at user
configurable temperature thresholds.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5150 Service Aggregation Switch 16-11

When temperatures exceed the maximum operating temperature, an


automatic over temperature shutdown is initiated to protect the 5150 from
damage. The thermal switch continues to monitor the temperature, and when
the temperature returns to the supported operating temperature range, the
unit will automatically restart and resume service.

Fans and Airflow


The only fans in the 5150 are present in the two power supply units. The fans
draw air from the front and side of the unit and exhaust out the rear. The 7.6
cm (3 inch) installation clearance at the front and 6.4 cm (2.5 inch) clearance
at the back of the unit assists with air flow by ensuring that the vents of the unit
are not blocked.

Note: Both power supplies need to be installed to provide sufficient


airflow for thermal management.

The power to the fan is supplied by the system power, not by the power supply
directly. This allows the fan to operate even if the power supply has failed. The
system will continue being adequately cooled even if one of the power
supplies is inoperable. However, if one of the power supplies has failed a
replacement power supply should be installed within a reasonable time period
to restore redundancy to the system.

Grounding
The 5150 is connected to ground at the power supplies and the chassis.

Note: The Battery Return lead is considered DC-I (isolated from frame
ground) as described in GR-1089-Core, Issue 4.

Power Supply Grounding


The safety ground connection is provided by one of the following:
DC power supply by the grounding terminal on the DC power supply
AC power supply by the AC power cord
Further details are provided in 5150 Hardware Installation and Start-up
Manual (009-3222-001).

WARNING
The DC version relies on the connector at the front of the
power supply to provide Safety Ground. This grounding
connection must be properly attached when the 5150 is
installed.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
16-12 5150 Service Aggregation Switch

WARNING
The AC version relies on the AC power cord for Safety ground.
The outlet providing power to the 5150 must meet the Local
and National Safety codes.

Supplemental Ground
A supplemental ground location is provided on the back of the chassis. This
ground location will support a 2-hole lug.

Figure 16-2
Rear of the 5150 chassis and rear grounding screw location

The grounding screws are provided and are located on the right side of center
on the rear of the chassis. See Figure 16-2 for the location of the grounding
screws.

The grounding lug and grounding wire are customer supplied. The following
description indicates the required specifications:
#6 AWG (minimum) wire
2 hole lug @ 5/8 centers and with hole size for #10 or 1/4 screw
The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines, and the grounding procedures used by your
company.

The DC resistance between the chassis and the supplemental ground source
should be verified to be less than 25 milliohms.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5150 Service Aggregation Switch 16-13

Resets
The 5150 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is located to the
left of the management port on the far right of the chassis.

Figure 16-3 shows the location of the reset button.

Figure 16-3
Location of the 5150 Reset Button

There are two different types of resets available:


Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than three seconds. A quick reset reboots the system with the current
saved configuration.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for three
seconds or more continuously. A hard reset erases the current
configuration and restores the unit to the factory default settings. See
Default configuration overview on page 18-1 for more information about
the factory default settings.
Note: It is also possible to initiate soft resets of the system through the
local console port, local management port, or the management VLAN.
Instructions for initiating a soft reset are included in the 39XX/51XX
Command Reference (009-3220-010).

Default Configuration
If the 5150 does not have an operational configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
Packet Networking portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview
on page 18-1. See that chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
16-14 5150 Service Aggregation Switch

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 5150 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit. With
the exception of the Console port and Alarm port, all the interfaces have
integrated LEDs which provide status information for the port.

Figure 16-1 on page 16-4 shows the faceplate of the unit and identifies the
locations of the different ports. More detailed LED information is provided in
5150 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3222-001).

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 5150 including:
10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports
Sync Port
Local Management Port (10/100/1000)
Console Port (EIA-561)
External Alarm Inputs
10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The faceplate of the 5150 can accommodate two pluggable modules. These
modules are identified as Module 2 (upper slot) and Module 3 (lower slot) on
the chassis label. Each module provides two 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports with
XFP connectors. Port 1 is the left port, and port 2 is the right port. The 10
Gigabit Ethernet ports can be configured as either NNI or UNI ports.

If these modules are not installed, a filler plate must be present in this location
to provide proper airflow in the chassis.

These ports use XFPs and the port characteristics are set by the capabilities
of the XFPs that are installed. The XFPs ports conform to the IEEE 802.3ae
10-Gigabit Ethernet standard. The XFPs are hot swappable.

These ports also include integrated status LEDs. Unsupported optics will
generate an LED indication and will not function. The list of supported XFPs
is documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-
602).

When the 5150 is installed in an outdoor application, extended temperature


XFPs are required.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5150 Service Aggregation Switch 16-15

100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Ports


The 5150 has forty-eight 100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports. These ports are
organized in four rows of twelve ports on the front left side of the chassis. This
block of ports is identified as Module 1 on the chassis label. Port 1 is the left
most port in the top row. Port 48 is the right most port in the bottom row. All
forty-eight ports can be configured as UNI ports. The twelve ports in the
bottom row (ports 37-48) can also be configured as NNI ports.

These ports use SFPs and the port characteristics are set by the capabilities
of the SFPs that are installed. The SFPs ports conform to the IEEE 802.3z
Gigabit Ethernet standard. The SFPs are hot swappable.

These ports also include integrated status LEDs. Unsupported optics will
generate an LED indication and will not function. The list of supported SFPs
is documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-
602).

When the 5150 is installed in an outdoor application, extended temperature


SFPs are required. When copper SFPs are used, these ports must be cabled
with shielded Cat 5e cables. Ensure that both ends of the shielded cable are
properly grounded.

Sync Port
Note: This port is available on the Standard with BITS option module only.
This optional module provides two 10 Gigabit XFP ports and a single BITS
interface. A single one of these modules can be installed in a 5150 system.

The port is located on the left side of the 10 Gigabit Option Module faceplate
and is labeled SYNC. This port uses an RJ-45 connector and is intended for
intra-building use only.

The sync port can be used as either a BITS-IN or BITS-OUT interface. For
assistance configuring this port, see 39XX/51XX Configuration (009-3220-
008).

Note: The BITS interface can be configured to be either BITS-IN or BITS-


OUT. It cannot support both BITS-IN and BITS-OUT simultaneously.

Ciena requires a shielded CAT-5 cable or better for this port. The shield of the
cable needs to be terminated at both ends. This interface is classified as intra-
building only.

This port has integrated status LEDs. See 5150 Hardware Installation and
Start-up Manual (009-3222-001) for more information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
16-16 5150 Service Aggregation Switch

Table 16-6 provides a summary of the parameters that are supported on the
sync port. These parameters are available on both BITS-IN and BITS-OUT
configurations.

Table 16-6
Sync Port Parameters

Signal Format Impedance Notes

1.544 Mbps (DS1) 100 Ohm DS1 SF/ESF AMI or B8ZS line coding.

2.048 Mbps (E1) 120 Ohm E1, Basic Frame, CRC4, AMI or HDB3 line coding.

The sync port pinout is provided in Table 16-7.

Table 16-7
Sync Port Pin Assignments

Pin # Signal Direction

1 Rx tip Input

2 Rx ring Input

3 Unused

4 Tx tip Output

5 Tx ring Output

6 Unused

7 Shield

8 Shield

Note: Connector is tab up, pin 1 is to the right when looking into the jack.

Local Management Port (10/100/1000)


The 5150 includes one 10/100/1000 Mbps port for out-of-band management.
This port is located on the right of the faceplate and is labeled MGMT 10/100/
1000. This port uses an RJ-45 connector and is fully compliant with the IEEE
802.3z Gigabit Ethernet standard.

The management port can be used to attach a PC directly to the device, or it


can be connected to the network for management. The management port
uses auto-MDI/MDIX. A straight through (MDI) or a crossover cable (MDIX)
can be connected to this port. Connection speed and duplex are negotiated
with auto-negotiation.

This port also includes integrated status LEDs. This port is intended for indoor
use only.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5150 Service Aggregation Switch 16-17

Console Port (EIA-561)


The 5150 includes one serial port with RJ-45 connector for maintenance
purposes. This port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled
Console. The console port can be used to attach a terminal or a PC to the
device for out-of-band management.

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the Packet
Networking portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1.
See that chapter for additional information.

External Alarm Inputs


The 5150 supports 5 external closed contact alarm inputs. The alarm
connector is a D-sub 15 style connector in the center/right section of the 5150
faceplate labelled Alarm.

The specifications of this port have been fully documented in the Alarms
chapter. See Alarm Custom Pin-out (15-pin D-sub connector) on page 19-4
for more information about this port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
16-18 5150 Service Aggregation Switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
17-1

5160 Service Aggregation Switch 17-

The 5160 provides premium 1/10 Gbps Carrier Ethernet Service Aggregation
capability, at a low cost. The 5160 requires only 1 RU of space and is easy to
install and deploy. In addition, the 5160 supports a range of SFP and SFP+
optics, providing port level flexibility to the available interfaces.

This powerful system is ideal for customers looking to evolve beyond 1 GbE
aggregation.

An overview of the chassis is provided in Figure 17-1.

Figure 17-1
Front view of the 5160
MGMT 10/100/1000
SYNC ALARMS
Power Modules

1G/10G Console

10MHz 1PPS

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
17-2 5160 Service Aggregation Switch

Hardware Overview
The product is designed so that all the user and management interfaces are
located on the front of the chassis. Table 17-1 provides a quick overview of
the interfaces available on the 5160 and Figure 17-1 on page 17-1 provides a
view of the front of the 5160.

Table 17-1
5160 Interface Summary

Port Type Number of Description


Ports

NNI/UNI 24 1/10 Gigabit Ethernet ports with SFP/SFP+ connectors. These are ports 1
to 24.
Optical SFP/SFP+ can be installed in any of these 24 ports.
Copper SGMII transceivers can be installed in any of the ports except ports
19 and 20. When copper transceivers are used the supported speeds are
10/100/1000M.
If the 5160 is configured to use RFC 2544 benchmarking, then Port 20
becomes unavailable, thereby reducing the effective port count of the 5160
system by one. The RFC 2544 benchmarking feature is enabled through
the CLI and requires the Advanced-OAM license of SAOS.
It is highly recommended that the network operator determine at
installation time whether RFC benchmarking will run on the 5160, and does
not change it thereafter. If you subsequently disable RFC 2544
benchmarking, a configuration save and system reboot is required before
Port 20 becomes available for use. If you subsequently enable RFC 2544
benchmarking, all traffic configuration that is directly or indirectly
associated with Port 20 must be removed, the configuration saved and the
system rebooted.

Management 1 10/100/1000 Mbps copper port (RJ-45) for out-of-band management

Console 1 Serial EIA-561 (RJ-45) port

Sync 1 BITS-In or BITS-Out, 1PPS and Time of Day (future).

1 PPS 1 1 PPS external synchronization port and Time of Day (future).

10 MHz 1 10 MHz external synchronization port.

Alarm 1 26-pin D-sub plug with custom pin-out

Note: Only Ciena approved optics can be used with the 5160. The SFP/SFP+ summary and orderable
part numbers are contained in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-602).
Note: For additional information about the external timing ports see External timing on page 20-1.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5160 Service Aggregation Switch 17-3

Chassis Size and Weight


The chassis of the 5160 occupies 1 rack unit (RU) of a standard 19-inch
equipment frame, allowing up to 42 devices in a single frame. The chassis has
the following dimensions:
Width: 44.4 cm (17.5 inches)
Depth: 25.4 cm (10 inches)
Height: 4.4 cm (1.75 inches)
The chassis is designed so that the power cabling and all interface cabling is
located on the faceplate of the chassis. The grounding cable is installed on the
rear of the chassis. For more information see Grounding on page 17-8.

Additional Clearances
To provide sufficient clearance for cabling and airflow, Ciena recommends the
following clearances:
Rear of chassis: 6.4 cm (2.5 inches)
Front of chassis: 7.6 cm (3 inches)
Note: The 5160 also draws air through intake vents on the right side of
the chassis. When the unit is installed you should ensure that this area is
not obstructed by cables running along the side of the frame.

System Weight
Before you start, ensure that the frame or mounting surface (wallmount
installations) is capable of supporting the weight of the system. Table 17-2
provides a list of the components that can be used in a system and their
weight.

Table 17-2
5160 Component Weight Summary

Component Weight (lbs) Weight (kg)

5160 without power supplies 9.39 4.26

AC power supply (up to 2 of these are used) 1.69 0.77

DC power supply (up to 2 of these are used) 1.8 0.82

5160 with 2 AC power supplies 12.79 5.8

5160 with 2 DC power supplies 13.0 5.9

Note: There will also be a small amount of incremental weight for SFPs and cabling.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
17-4 5160 Service Aggregation Switch

Mounting
The following mounting brackets are available:
19-inch frame (this bracket is part of the 5160 kit)
23-inch frame
Wall Mount
The brackets are attached to the chassis using 3 (wallmount bracket) or 4
(frame mount brackets) screw holes.

The frame mount brackets are also compatible with cable support brackets
that are designed to keep cables out of adjacent equipment space. See 5160
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3207-001) for more
information.

The wallmount bracket allows the chassis to be mounted on a wall. The


wallmount bracket does not contain any cable management features. See
5160 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3207-001) for more
information.

Note: For installations using the wallmount bracket, the hardware


required to attach the mounting bracket to the wall is Customer supplied.
In addition, the reinforced mounting surface should be capable of
supporting approximately 100 pounds. Please ensure that the hardware
used includes the proper fasteners/anchors required to support the weight
of the unit.

Power Options
The 5160 has redundant power supplies which are accessed from the front of
the chassis. Both AC and DC power supplies are available. The system is also
capable of operation with a single power supply, however redundant power
supplies are recommended. When a single power supply is used, the empty
power supply bay must be covered with a filler plate. A filler plate is provided
with the base system.

Because the power unit is redundant, the power supplies are hot swappable
and field replaceable. With both power supplies installed, the power supplies
provide system power simultaneously (load sharing). During power supply
replacement, the remaining power supply will compensate to maintain
uninterrupted system operation. If one of the power supply units fails, it should
be replaced as soon as possible.

Note: The system can remain on, however, the power module being
removed and installed must be unpowered. In some configurations,
replacing a power supply can be a service impacting procedure.

Table 17-3 on page 17-5 provides a summary of the available power options.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5160 Service Aggregation Switch 17-5

Table 17-3
5160 Power Supply Overview

Module Part Number Power Range Breaker

AC power supply 170-0070-900 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 Amp


2.8 Amps maximum

DC power supply 170-0069-900 20V DC to 60V DC, 12 Amps (24V or 36V)


12 Amps maximum or 6 Amps (48V)

Note: When two power supplies are installed, use power supplies of the same type. Do not combine
AC and DC power supplies in the same installation. This is an untested configuration and is not
supported.
Note: The breaker information provided in this table specifies the minimum current ratings. The
breakers and wiring must be installed only by qualified service personnel in accordance with all local and
national electrical codes. The wiring at your site needs to support the breaker rating you choose and
meet the relevant electrical codes.

DC Power Supply
The DC power supply module is a wide range DC power module and accepts
a range of input voltages (see Table 17-3) including -/+48 V DC, -/+36 V DC
or -/+24 V DC.

The connections to the DC mains and ground are made using a terminal block
available on the faceplate of each power supply.

The DC power cord should be a 14 AWG - 16 AWG wire. You will also need
to install fork terminal spade lugs on the power cord wires to ensure a proper
connection with the terminal block of the power supply. Table 17-4 contains a
summary of the recommended locking fork terminal lugs.

Table 17-4
5160 DC Lug Summary

Wire Size Stud Maximum Lug Width Recommended Lug

14 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6FF-C (16-14 AWG)

14 and 18 AWG #6 0.31 Panduit PV14-6LF-C (18-14 AWG)

Panduit PV14-6LFW-C (18-14 AWG)

Note: Use one of these recommended lugs or a close equivalent. If a ring lug is used, you will need to
remove and reinstall the screw. Take care not to lose the screw during this process.

Table 17-3 summarizes the minimum breaker values for 24 V, 36 V and 48 V


input installations.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
17-6 5160 Service Aggregation Switch

In order to successfully replace the power supply while the unit is operating,
the DC power supplies must be powered off separate breakers. This allows
you to turn off power feeding the power supply that is being replaced. While
the second independent circuit remains on, and powers the unit during the
replacement process. As a result, Ciena recommends that each DC power
supply be connected to a separate breaker.

AC Power Supply
The AC power supply module is a wide range AC power module and accepts
input voltages of 100 V to 240 V AC nominal. The AC power cord connects to
the faceplate of the module using a standard plug.

WARNING

As per GR-1089 Section 4.12 an external Surge Protective


Device (SPD) is required at the AC input of the 5160.

The faceplate is equipped with a bail lock mechanism to assist with power
cord retention. The bail lock snaps over the hood of the power cord and
prevents it from becoming accidentally unplugged when the power cord is
pulled. To remove the power cord from the AC power supply you need to
remove the bail lock before tugging on the power cable.

For each 5160 device with redundant power supplies you will need two power
cords. The exact specifications of the cord required will vary depending on:
AC or DC power supply
local power codes for example, the configuration of the plug that is
attached to the power source will vary for each region around the world.
You need to obtain the correct power cord to meet your local
requirements.

WARNING

All AC power cords must meet the requirements of the local


and national electric codes prior to installation.

Ciena offers the following AC power cables for the 5160:


AC Power Cord, IEC C13, Europe
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, North America
AC Power Cord, IEC C13, United Kingdom
AC Power Cord, C13, Universal

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5160 Service Aggregation Switch 17-7

Power Status LEDs


The status of the power supplies is visible on the faceplate of the 5160 through
the INPUT and OUTPUT LEDs on each power supply. See the 5160
Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3207-001) for a detailed
description of the LED indications.

Power Supply Failure


If a problem occurs with the power supply, an alarm is raised and an SNMP
trap is sent. If the power supply has been disabled, an LED indication will also
occur showing the defective power supply is off.

After a problem has been identified, the power supply should be replaced. See
5160 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3207-001) for the
procedures to remove a power supply and install a new unit.

Dying Gasp
The 5160 supports dying gasp functionality. In the event of a power failure, the
5160 sends a dying gasp notification to the network. The notification also
contains a syslog entry (if syslog is enabled).

Note: When the system is powered by redundant power supplies, a dying


gasp message will only be sent if both power supplies lose power.

Environmental Control
The 5160 is designed for deployment in Outdoor Street Cabinets, huts and
other unconditioned locations and supports the following environmental
range:
-40C to +65C (-40F to 149F) operating ambient temperature up to an
altitude of 4000 m
-40C to +70C storage temperature
5% to 95% non-condensing humidity
Extreme Temperature Conditions
The 5160 has internal temperature sensors that monitor the temperature
within the unit. The software supports alarms, traps and logs at user
configurable temperature thresholds.

When temperatures exceed the maximum operating temperature, an


automatic over temperature shutdown is initiated to protect the 5160 from
damage. The system is powered down but the fans remain on to assist with
cooling the unit. The thermal switch continues to monitor the temperature, and
when the temperature returns to the supported operating temperature range,
the unit will automatically restart and resume service.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
17-8 5160 Service Aggregation Switch

Fans and Airflow


The 5160 chassis is equipped with three fans to provide adequate airflow. The
fans draw air from the front and right side of the unit, and exhaust out the rear.
The 7.6 cm (3 inch) installation clearance at the front and 6.4 cm (2.5 inch)
clearance at the back of the unit assists with air flow by ensuring that the vents
of the unit are not blocked. You should also ensure that the air vents on the
right side of the chassis are not obstructed by cables running along the side
of the frame.

When only one power supply is installed in the 5160, the second power supply
bay must be covered with a filler plate. The filler plate is necessary to ensure
proper airflow within the 5160. The unit is initially supplied with a filler plate. If
it is misplaced, a replacement can be ordered from Ciena.

Fan Failure
If a fan failure occurs, an alarm is raised and an SNMP trap is sent. When a
single fan fails in the 5160 the platform continues to function normally and
meet all specifications. However, the unit should be scheduled for servicing by
Ciena. Replacing the fans is a service impacting repair since the unit must be
taken completely offline and returned to Ciena for repair. If a unit is returned
for a fan failure, all three fans in the system are replaced by Ciena.

Grounding
The 5160 is connected to ground at the power supplies and the chassis.

Note: The Battery Return lead is considered DC-I (isolated from frame
ground) as described in GR-1089-Core, Issue 6.

Power Supply Grounding


The safety ground connection is provided by the AC power cord or by the
grounding terminal on the DC power supply. Further details are provided in
5160 Hardware Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3207-001).

WARNING

The AC version relies on the AC power cord for Safety ground.


The outlet providing power to the 5160 must meet the Local
and National Safety codes.

WARNING

The DC version relies on the connector at the front of the


power supply to provide Safety Ground. This grounding
connection must be properly attached when the 5160 is
installed.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5160 Service Aggregation Switch 17-9

Supplemental Ground
A supplemental ground location is provided on the back of the chassis. This
ground location will support a 2-hole lug.

The grounding screws are provided and are located on the rear of the chassis
in the center. See Figure 17-2 on page 17-9 for the location of the grounding
screws.

The grounding lug and grounding wire are customer supplied. The following
description indicates the required specifications:
#6 AWG (minimum) wire
2 hole lug @ 5/8 centers and with hole size for #10 or 1/4 screw
The ground source should be connected in accordance with local and national
regulations and safety guidelines, and the grounding procedures used by your
company.

The DC resistance between the chassis and the supplemental ground source
should be verified to be less than 100 milliohms.

Figure 17-2
Rear of the 5160 Chassis and Rear Grounding Screw Location

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
17-10 5160 Service Aggregation Switch

Resets
It is possible to initiate soft resets of the system through the local console port,
local management port, or the management VLAN. Instructions for initiating a
soft reset are included in the 39XX/51XX Command Reference (009-3220-
010). This is the recommended way to reset the system.

The 5160 has a reset button. To avoid accidentally triggering the reset button,
it is recessed behind the faceplate. You will need a straightened paper clip or
similar small tool to depress the reset button. The reset button is located to the
left of the management port on the far right of the chassis. Figure 17-3 shows
the location of the reset button.

Figure 17-3
Location of the 5160 Reset Button

Reset Button
There are two different types of resets available:
Quick reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for less
than three seconds. A quick reset reboots the system with the current
saved configuration. When you press the reset button for less than 3
seconds, all the LEDs on the faceplate will be lit.
Hard reset, which is accomplished by depressing the reset button for three
seconds or more continuously. When you press the reset button for more
than 3 seconds, all the LEDs on the faceplate will be lit, then they will flash
to indicate that the hard reset has been initiated. A hard reset erases the
current configuration and restores the unit to the factory default settings.
See Default configuration overview on page 18-1 for more information
about the factory default settings.
Note: If the reset button is pressed when the system is unresponsive, an
additional logging behavior will be triggered. See Creating a State Dump
or Core Dump Log File on page 17-11 for more information.

Note: Pressing the reset button will also result in an LED indication. The
LED behavior is described in 5160 Hardware Installation and Start-up
Manual (009-3207-001).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5160 Service Aggregation Switch 17-11

Creating a State Dump or Core Dump Log File


Two types of log files are available:
State dump log The state dump provides a summary of the current and
previous state of the system.
Core dump log The core dump provides a summary of the processes
that were running when the system became unresponsive.
The creation of these files is triggered by depressing the reset button (for
either a quick or hard reset) on 5160 systems.

The log file creation varies depending on the state of the system when the
reset button is depressed. One of the following scenarios will occur:
System was responsive when the reset button was depressed The
state dump file is generated before the system reboots. There will be
minimal delay (approximately 5 seconds) while the state dump file is
created and stored to the system memory. After the state dump file is
created the system will reboot.
System was unresponsive when the reset button was depressed
In this case a full core dump will be initiated, and then a state dump. There
will be a delay (up to 2 minutes) while the core dump file is created and
stored to system memory. Next the state dump file is created and stored
to system memory. After the both the core dump and state dump files are
created the system will reboot.
When the system reboots, you will be able to retrieve the state dump file and
core dump file (if it exists) from the system. The log files are stored in the
following locations:
State dump log files: /mnt/sysfs/log/push_button_state-dump
Note: If a state dump file already exists on the system, it will be renamed
push_button_state-dump.prev when the new file is created.

Core dump log files: /tmp/corefiles/


These files can be used to assist with troubleshooting the system.

Default Configuration
If the 5160 does not have an operational configuration, the default
configuration will be used. The default configuration for the products in the
Packet Networking portfolio are captured in Default configuration overview
on page 18-1. Please see that chapter for additional information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
17-12 5160 Service Aggregation Switch

Interfaces
All interfaces on the 5160 are accessible from the faceplate of the unit. With
the exception of the Console port and Alarm port, all the interfaces have
integrated LEDs which provide status information for the port. Figure 17-1 on
page 17-1shows the faceplate of the unit and identifies the locations of the
different ports.

This section will provide an overview of the functionality of each type of port
available on the 5160 including:
1/10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
Local Management Port (10/100/1000)
Sync Port
1 PPS
10 MHz
Console Port (EIA-561)
External Alarm Inputs
1/10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The faceplate of the 5160 has 24 high-capacity ports. All ports are UNI
capable. Ports 21 to 24 are NNI capable. All ports support both SFP and SFP+
modules.

These ports are capable of operating at 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps (SFP+) speeds.


The port characteristics are set by the capabilities of the SFPs that are
installed. The SFP ports conform to the IEEE 802.3ae 10-Gigabit Ethernet
standard and are hot-swappable.

These ports also include integrated status LEDs. See 5160 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3207-001) for more information.

Unsupported optics may not function. The list of supported SFP/SFP+ optics
is documented in Packet Networking Transceivers Reference (009-2011-
602). When the 5160 is installed in an outdoor application, extended
temperature optics are required.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
5160 Service Aggregation Switch 17-13

Local Management Port (10/100/1000)


The 5160 includes one 10/100 Mbps port for out-of-band management. This
port is located on the right of the faceplate and is labeled MGMT 10/100/1000.
This port uses an RJ-45 connector and is fully compliant with the IEEE 802.3u
1000Base-Tx Ethernet standard.

Ciena requires the use of a Cat 5 STP cable or better for the Management
port. The cable shield must be terminated at both ends. This port is classified
as intra-building only.

The management port can be used to attach a PC directly to the device, or it


can be connected to the network for management. The management port
uses auto-MDI/MDIX. A straight through (MDI) or a crossover cable (MDIX)
can be connected to this port. Connection speed and duplex are negotiated
with auto-negotiation.

This port also includes integrated status LEDs. See 5160 Hardware
Installation and Start-up Manual (009-3207-001) for more information.

Sync Port
The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled SYNC. This
port is used as either a BITS-IN or BITS-OUT interface.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See Sync port on
page 20-3 for more information about this port.

1 PPS
The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled 1PPS.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See 1 PPS on page
20-6 for more information about this port.

10 MHz
The port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled 10MHz.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the External timing chapter. See 10 MHz on page
20-7 for more information about this port.

Console Port (EIA-561)


The 5160 includes one serial port with RJ-45 connector for maintenance
purposes. This port is located on the right side of the faceplate and is labeled
Console. The two LEDs present on the connector are unused.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
17-14 5160 Service Aggregation Switch

The console port pinout and cabling information for the products in the Packet
Networking portfolio are captured in Console port overview on page 21-1.
Please see that chapter for additional information.

External Alarm Inputs


The 5160 supports 16 external alarm inputs. The alarm connector is located
in the center/right section of the 5160 labeled ALARMS.

The specifications of this port are common across multiple products and have
been fully documented in the Alarms chapter. See Alarm Custom Pin-out
(26-pin D-sub connector) on page 19-5 for more information about this port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
18-1

Default configuration overview 18-

If a system does not have an operational configuration, the default


configuration will be used. Default port settings vary depending on the
platform and port number. Table 18-1 shows the general settings applicable
to all ports and platforms.

Table 18-1
Default settings - applicable to all ports and platforms

Attribute Default setting

Flow Control Advertisement Off

Flow Control Off

Duplex Full

Ingress VLAN Filter Enabled

Max Frame Size 1526

PVID 1

Egress Untagged VLAN 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
18-2 Default configuration overview

Table 18-2 shows the default general settings that vary by platform.

Table 18-2
Factory default general port settings by platform

Platform Ports Type Connector Speed VLAN Acceptable Auto Dying


mode frame types negotiation Gasp

3902 1 UNI RJ-45 1 Gbps 1 All On No

2 NNI SFP 1 Gbps 1, 127 Tagged Only On No

3911 1-8 UNI RJ-45 1 Gbps 1 All On No

9-10 NNI Default Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes

3916 1-2 UNI Default 1 Gbps 1 All On No

3-4 NNI SFP Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes

5-6 NNI SFP 1 Gbps 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes

3920 1-8 UNI RJ-45 1 Gbps 1 All On No

9-12 NNI Default Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes

3930 1-4 UNI Default 1 Gbps 1 All On No

5-8 UNI SFP 1 Gbps 1 All On No

9-10 NNI SFP Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes


(Note 1)

3931 1-4 UNI SFP 1 Gbps 1 All On No

5-8 UNI RJ-45 1 Gbps 1 All On No

9-10 NNI SFP Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes


(Note 1)

3932 1-4 UNI Default 1 Gbps 1 All On No

5-8 UNI SFP 1 Gbps 1 All On No

9-10 NNI SFP Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes


(Note 1)

3940 1-20 UNI Default 1 Gbps 1, 127 All On No

21-24 NNI Default Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes


Enhanced

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
Default configuration overview 18-3

Table 18-2
Factory default general port settings by platform (continued)

Platform Ports Type Connector Speed VLAN Acceptable Auto Dying


mode frame types negotiation Gasp

3960 1-8 UNI Default 1 Gbps 1 All On No

9-10 UNI SFP 10 Gbps 1, 127 Tagged Only Off No

11-12 NNI SFP 10 Gbps 1, 127 Tagged Only Off Yes


Enhanced (Note 2)

5140 1-20 UNI Default Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On No

21-24 NNI Default Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes


Enhanced

5142 1-20 UNI SFP Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes

21-24 NNI SFP Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes


(Note 3)

5150 1-36 UNI SFP Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On No

37-48 UNI/NNI SFP Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes

2.1, NNI SFP 10 Gbps 1, 127 Tagged Only Off Yes


2.2, (Enhanced (Note 2)
3.1, 3.2 is module
dependent)

5160 1-24 NNI SFP Auto 1, 127 Tagged Only On Yes


(Note 4)

Note 1: On the 3930, 3931 and 3932, when a 10 Gbps SFP+ is installed in NNI ports 9 and 10, auto-
negotiation is turned off to override the default setting (on). The SFP mode accepts both SFP and SFP+
without changing the defaults.
Note 2: On the 3960 and 5150, the admin mode for the 10 Gbps ports is SFP, although the only type of
optic that can be inserted is an XFP.
Note 3: On the 5142,when a 10 Gbps SFP+ is installed in NNI ports 21 to 24, auto-negotiation is turned
off to override the default setting (on). The SFP mode accepts both SFP and SFP+ without changing the
defaults.
Note 4: On the 5160 when a 10 Gbps SFP+ is installed in any of the ports, auto-negotiation is turned
off to override the default setting (on). The SFP mode accepts both SFP and SFP+ without changing the
defaults.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
18-4 Default configuration overview

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
19-1

Alarms 19-

Some of the products within the Packet Networking portfolio have alarm ports
that can be used to accept external alarm inputs. The number of external
alarm inputs and alarm port pin assignments varies from product to product.
However, the overall function of the alarm circuit is the same for all products
in the portfolio. This chapter provides an overview of the alarm circuit
guidelines and links to the alarm pin outs for all products.

This chapter covers the following topics:


Alarm Connection Summary
Alarm Circuit Guidelines
Alarm Custom Pin-out (15-pin D-sub connector)
Alarm Custom Pin-out (26-pin D-sub connector)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
19-2 Alarms

Alarm Connection Summary


Table 19-1 provides a summary of the alarm connections by platform.

Note: Products within the Packet Networking portfolio that do not have
alarm inputs have been removed from this table.

Table 19-1
Alarm Connection Summary by Platform

Platform Number of Connector Alarm Cable


Inputs

3930 16 26-pin D-sub with custom pin-out. 15 foot alarm cable with high density
See Alarm Custom Pin-out (26-pin 26-pin D-sub on one end and bare wires
D-sub connector) on page 19-5. on the other end.

3931 5 Screw-down terminal-block. Custom alarm cable with no connector.


See Terminal Block Alarm Inputs A screw-down terminal-block type
on page 19-6. connector is used to secure the bare
wires of the alarm cable to the 3931.

3932 16 26-pin D-sub with custom pin-out. 15 foot alarm cable with high density
See Alarm Custom Pin-out (26-pin 26-pin D-sub on one end and bare wires
D-sub connector) on page 19-5. on the other end

5142 16 26-pin D-sub with custom pin-out. 15 foot alarm cable with high density
See Alarm Custom Pin-out (26-pin 26-pin D-sub on one end and bare wires
D-sub connector) on page 19-5. on the other end

5150 5 15-pin D-sub with custom pin-out. 15 foot alarm cable with high density
See Alarm Custom Pin-out (15-pin 15-pin D-sub on one end and bare wires
D-sub connector) on page 19-4. on the other end. There are only 14 pins
defined and used on both the connector
and alarm cable.

5160 16 26-pin D-sub with custom pin-out. 15 foot alarm cable with high density
See Alarm Custom Pin-out (26-pin 26-pin D-sub on one end and bare wires
D-sub connector) on page 19-5. on the other end

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
Alarms 19-3

Alarm Circuit Guidelines


The systems in the Packet Networking portfolio that support external alarm
inputs are listed in Table 19-1 on page 19-2. The alarm circuitry for all these
systems follows the same basic guidelines as outlined in this section.

Alarm Sense Circuit


The alarm sense circuit has the following characteristics:
Is negative with respect to local ground
Will be within +/- 60 V of local ground
The sense loop can be closed if the alarm sense is connected to a remote
ground as opposed to the supplied sense return signal
Current in the sense loop will be less than 2 mA when closed with a short
The default state of each alarm circuit can be open or closed. The system
will flag any state changes.
Alarm Circuit Voltage
The alarm circuit voltage behavior is as follows:
The alarm will not be triggered with a leakage current of up to +/- 1 uA
The alarm will function normally if a resistance of 8.6K or less and a
voltage of +/- 6.8 V or less is introduced into the loop.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
19-4 Alarms

Alarm Custom Pin-out (15-pin D-sub connector)


The 15-pin D-sub connector is used for the alarm connection on the 5150.
The 5150 supports 5 external closed contact alarm inputs. The alarm
connector is a D-sub 15 style connector in the center/right section of the 5150
faceplate labelled Alarm. The 5150 uses a custom alarm connection, and
there are only 14 pins defined and used on both the connector and the alarm
cable. The 15 foot alarm cable has a D-sub connector on one end, and bare
wires on the other. These wires are then connected to a wire wrap panel.

The alarm port pinout is provided in Table 19-2 on page 19-4.

Table 19-2
Alarm Port Pin Assignments on 5150

Pin # Lead Pin # Lead

1 Input Alarm 5 9 No pin

2 Input Alarm 4 10 Not used

3 Input Alarm 3 11 Return Alarm 5

4 Input Alarm 2 12 Return Alarm 4

5 Input Alarm 1 13 Return Alarm 3

6 Not used 14 Return Alarm 2

7 Not used 15 Return Alarm 1

8 Not used

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
Alarms 19-5

Alarm Custom Pin-out (26-pin D-sub connector)


The 26-pin D-sub connector is used for the alarm connection on the following
platforms:
3930
3932
5142
5160
A custom cable is available to connect to the alarm input on systems using the
26-pin D-sub connector. The 15 foot alarm cable has a high density 26-pin D-
sub connector on one end, and bare wires on the other. These wires are then
connected to a wire wrap panel.

Of the 26 pins on the connector, there are 16 return sense connections to


detect switch close or opens and 8 returns. Up to two alarm sense lines can
be connected to each return. The alarm sense lines can be paired with any
return, however, it is recommended that the sensed switches that are paired
come from equipment that is commonly grounded. The alarm pinout is
provided in Table 19-3 on page 19-5.

Table 19-3
Alarm Port Pin Assignments for 26-pin D-sub Connector (3930, 3932, 5142 and 5160)

Pin # Lead Color Pin # Lead Color

1 Alarm sense 15 WH/BL 14 Alarm sense return 4 RD/OR

2 Alarm sense 13 BL/WH 15 Alarm sense return 3 OR/RD

3 Alarm sense 11 WH/OR 16 Alarm sense return 2 RD/GR

4 Alarm sense 9 OR/WH 17 Alarm sense return 1 GR/RD

5 Alarm sense 7 WH/GR 18 Frame ground No connect

6 Alarm sense 5 GR/WH 19 Alarm sense 16 RD/BR

7 Alarm sense 3 WH/BR 20 Alarm sense 14 BR/RD

8 Alarm sense 1 BR/WH 21 Alarm sense 12 RD/SL

9 Frame ground No connect 22 Alarm sense 10 SL/RD

10 Alarm sense return 8 WH/SL 23 Alarm sense 8 BK/BL

11 Alarm sense return 7 SL/WH 24 Alarm sense 6 BL/BK

12 Alarm sense return 6 RD/BL 25 Alarm sense 4 BK/OR

13 Alarm sense return 5 BL/RD 26 Alarm sense 2 OR/BK

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
19-6 Alarms

Terminal Block Alarm Inputs


The 3931 supports 5 external alarm inputs. A screw-down terminal-block type
connector is used to accept the external alarms. See Figure 19-1.

Figure 19-1
Location of the 3931 Alarm Input Block

The connector supports 10 wires, in pairs of alarm and return. For example,
pin 1 is the alarm sense for Alarm 1, and pin 2 is the alarm return lead for
Alarm 1. The alarms will detect a short or open circuit. All the return pins are
bridged on the 3931 electronics module. This allows you to connect a single
return wire for use by multiple alarms. There is no defined mapping between
the alarm-sense lead and the alarm type. The alarms that you connect need
to be configured in the software.

Note: The 3931 also has a number of internal alarms. See Internal
Alarms on page 10-14 for more information.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
20-1

External timing 20-

Some of the products within the Packet Networking portfolio have external
timing interfaces. Table 20-1 provides a summary.

Table 20-1
External Timing Summary

Port Name Connector Capability of Type of Timing Notes


Port Recovered or
Distributed
from Interface

SYNC RJ-45 BITS-IN Frequency The port can be used as either a BITS-
IN or BITS-OUT interface. It cannot
BITS-OUT Frequency support both BITS-IN and BITS-OUT
simultaneously.

1 PPS Phase

Time of Day Time-of-day The systems are hardware ready to


support Time of Day. In release 6.12,
time-of-day extracted from PTP is only
displayed. Full time-of-day
functionality will be supported in a
future release.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
20-2 External timing

Table 20-1
External Timing Summary

Port Name Connector Capability of Type of Timing Notes


Port Recovered or
Distributed
from Interface

1 PPS SMB 1 PPS Phase and


Time-of-day

Time of Day Time-of-day The systems are hardware ready to


support Time of Day. In release 6.12,
time-of-day extracted from PTP is only
displayed. Full time-of-day
functionality will be supported in a
future release

10 MHz SMB 10 MHz Frequency Supports the following rates: 1.544


MHz, 2.048 MHz, or 10 MHz.

Note: External timing interfaces can be configured to either receive a signal or provide an output signal.
They cannot support both transmit and receive simultaneously.
Note: The 5150 have a SYNC port when the Standard with BITS option module is installed. However,
the 5150 SYNC port has different functionality than the SYNC port on the rest of the products in the
portfolio. For information about the 5150 port see Sync Port on page 16-15. Information about the 3930
Sync + External Timing, 3932, 5142 and 5160 systems is included in the current chapter.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
External timing 20-3

This chapter will provide an overview of each of these timing ports. The
faceplate location for each of these ports will vary from product to product.
See the following graphics for assistance locating these ports:
3930 Sync + External Timing Figure 9-2 on page 9-2
3932 Figure 11-1 on page 11-1
5142 Figure 15-1 on page 15-1
5160 Figure 17-1 on page 17-1
Note: External timing interfaces are not supported on the 3930 Standard
and 3930 Sync systems. For more information see 3930 Service Delivery
Switch on page 9-1.

For assistance configuring these ports, see 39XX/51XX Configuration (009-


3220-008).

Sync port
This port is labeled SYNC on the faceplate. The port uses an RJ-45 connector
and is intended for intra-building use only. This port has integrated status
LEDs. See the product hardware installation guide for more information.

The sync port can be used for the following:


BITS the port can be used as either a BITS-IN or BITS-OUT interface.
It cannot support both BITS-IN and BITS-OUT simultaneously.
1 PPS
Time of Day
Note 1: The 5150 also have a SYNC port when the Standard with BITS
option module is installed. This optional module provides two 10 Gigabit
XFP ports and a single BITS interface. A single one of these modules can
be installed in a 5150 system. The SYNC port on the 5150 can be used
for BITS-IN or BITS-OUT only. See Sync Port on page 16-15 for more
information.
Note 2: The 5150 Sync Variant has an upgraded Stratum 3E OCXO and
supports PTP timing.
Table 20-2 provides a summary of the parameters that are supported on the
sync port. These parameters are available on both BITS-IN and BITS-OUT
configurations.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
20-4 External timing

Table 20-2
Sync port parameters

Signal Format Impedance Notes

1.544 Mbps (DS1) 100 Ohm DS1 SF/ESF AMI or B8ZS line
coding.

2.048 Mbps (E1) 120 Ohm E1, Basic Frame, CRC4, AMI or
HDB3 line coding.

2 MHz 120 Ohm

Both 1 PPS and ToD input signals can be directed to, or 1 PPS and ToD
output signals can be directed from, the relevant pins on the SYNC port. The
ToD signal on the SYNC port uses RS-422.

Ciena offers two optional cables for this interface that are 6 foot long shielded
cables with the following specifications:
100 Ohm cable with RJ-45 connectors is cable 170-0083-900
120 Ohm cable with RJ-45 connectors is cable 170-0084-900
One end has a shielded RJ-45 connector and the other end is un-terminated.
When using this cable, the shield of the un-terminated end must be
connected.

The sync cable wiring connection summary is provided in Table 20-3.

Table 20-3
Sync cable wiring connection summary

Pair Color Signal Pin #

1 White Rx tip 1

Blue Rx ring 2

2 White ToD/1PPS 3

Green ToD/1PPS 6

3 White Tx tip 4

Orange Tx ring 5

4 White 7

Brown 8

Note: The wiring information in this table applies to both the available Ciena cables.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
External timing 20-5

A customer-supplied cable can also be used provided the following:


the cable is shielded
the cable is CAT 5 or better
the shield is terminated at both ends

The sync port pinout is provided in Table 20-4 on page 20-5.

Table 20-4
Sync port pin assignments

Pin # Signal Direction

1 Rx tip Input

2 Rx ring Input

3 ToD/1PPS Bidirectional

4 Tx tip Output

5 Tx ring Output

6 ToD/1PPS Bidirectional

7 Shield

8 Shield

Note: Connector is tab up, pin 1 is to the right when looking into the jack.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
20-6 External timing

1 PPS
The port is labeled 1 PPS on the faceplate. This port uses an 50 Ohm SMB
interface.

The 1 Pulse Per Second (1 PPS) port is used to provide external


synchronization with a 1 PPS signal. This port can be configured to receive a
1pps input or to provide a 1pps output.

Table 20-5 provides a summary of the supported settings.

Table 20-5
1 PPS port settings

Attribute 1PPS (Input) 1PPS (Output)

Waveform Pulse Shape Pulse Shape

Amplitude 2.4 V TTL 2.4 V TTL

Impedance 50 Ohm 50 Ohm

Pulse Width 26 microsecond 26 microseconds

Rise Time 20 nanosecond 20 nanoseconds

Ciena offers a cable (170-0085-900) for connection to this port. The cable is
6 feet long, with coax on one end and an SMB connector on the other.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
External timing 20-7

10 MHz
The port is labeled 10MHz on the faceplate. This port uses an 50 Ohm SMB
interface. A cable is available for connection to this interface.

The 10 MHz port is used to provide external synchronization with a GPS


signal. The following rates are supported: 1.544 MHz, 2.048 MHz, or 10 MHz.
This port can be configured to receive input from a GPS receiver or to provide
an output at these frequencies.

Table 20-6 provides a summary of the supported settings.

Table 20-6
10 MHz port settings

Attribute 10MHz (Input) 10MHz (Output)

Waveform Sine Wave Square Wave

Amplitude 1.7 V p-p 2.4 V TTL

Impedance 50 Ohm 50 Ohm

Pulse Width 50% duty cycle 50% duty cycle

Rise Time AC coupled 20 nanoseconds

Ciena offers a cable (170-0085-900) for connection to this port. The cable is
6 feet long, with coax on one end and an SMB connector on the other.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
20-8 External timing

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
21-1

Console port overview 21-

Products in the Packet Networking portfolio have a console port that can be
used to attach a terminal or a PC to the device for out-of-band management.
This port is not intended to be installed as a permanent connection. It is
labeled Console.

Note: The serial console port does not support connectivity to a modem.

The console port can be either DB-9 or RJ-45. Table 21-1 provides a
summary of the connection type by platform.

Table 21-1
Console port connection summary by platform

Platform Console port Console pinout Console cables Ethernet


management port

3902 RJ-45 EIA-561 RJ-45 Console Cable

3911 DB-9 EIA-232 Null Modem

3916 RJ-45 EIA-561 RJ-45 Console Cable

3920 DB-9 EIA-232 Null Modem 10/100/1000 RJ-45

3930 RJ-45 EIA-561 RJ-45 Console Cable 10/100 RJ-45

3931 RJ-45 EIA-561 RJ-45 Console Cable

3932 RJ-45 EIA-561 RJ-45 Console Cable 10/100 RJ-45

3940 DB-9 EIA-232 Null Modem 10/100/1000 RJ-45

3960 DB-9 EIA-232 Null Modem 10/100/1000 RJ-45

5140 DB-9 EIA-232 Null Modem 10/100/1000 RJ-45

5142 RJ-45 EIA-561 RJ-45 Console Cable 10/100/1000 RJ-45

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
21-2 Console port overview

Table 21-1
Console port connection summary by platform (continued)

Platform Console port Console pinout Console cables Ethernet


management port

5150 RJ-45 EIA-561 RJ-45 Console Cable 10-100/1000 RJ-45

5160 RJ-45 EIA-561 RJ-45 Console Cable 10-100/1000 RJ-45

Note: Multiple RJ-45 cables are available. See RJ-45 console cable on page 21-4 for more
information.

There are two console pinouts:


EIA-232 this is used by DB-9 console ports on Packet Networking
products
EIA-561 this is used by RJ-45 console ports on Packet Networking
products
Additional information is provided in this chapter.

Serial EIA-232 on DB-9


The EIA-232 port connector utilizes a standard DB-9 connector that follows
standard DTE wiring pin assignment. Figure 21-1 shows the DB-9 device side
(male connector) pin locations. The corresponding EIA-232 console port
pinout is provided in Table 21-2 on page 21-2.

Figure 21-1
DB-9 connector pin-out

Table 21-2
Serial EIA-232 on DB-9 console port pin assignments

Pin # Lead

2 Receive

3 Transmit

5 Ground

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
Console port overview 21-3

Table 21-2
Serial EIA-232 on DB-9 console port pin assignments (continued)

Pin # Lead

Note: Figure 21-1 shows the pin locations.

DB-9 console cable


A null modem cable should be used to connect a PC (DTE) to the device
console port. You can use a standard DB-9 to USB adaptor cable.

Serial EIA-561 on RJ-45


The EIA-561 port connector uses a standard RJ-45 connector. Figure 21-2
shows the connector pin locations. Table 21-2 shows the console port
pinouts.
Figure 21-2
RJ-45 connector pin-out

Table 21-3
Serial EIA-561 on RJ-45 Console port pin assignments

Pin # Lead

4 Signal Ground

5 Received Data Line

6 Transmitted Data Line

Note: Figure 21-2 shows the pin locations.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
21-4 Console port overview

RJ-45 console cable


Note: The console cable can be used for a number of Ciena products
within the Packet Networking portfolio. See Table 21-1 on page 21-1 for a
summary.
The console RJ-45 pinout is EIA compatible and can be converted to DB-9
(male or female) or Cisco pinout with separately purchased Ciena conversion
cables. There are three adapter cables available:
Console Serial Adapter (170-0062-900), RJ-45 EIA to Cisco RJ-45 pinout,
6 inches must be connected to a customer supplied null modem cable
Console Serial Cable (170-0063-900), RJ-45 EIA to DB-9 Female for
direct connection to laptop, 6 ft no additional cables required.
Console Serial Adapter (170-0064-900), RJ-45 EIA pinout to DB-9 male
connector, 6 inches must be connected to a customer supplied null
modem cable
Console port connection settings
On 3916, 3930, 3931, and 5150 switches, the serial console port requires a
null modem cable connected to a male DB-9 to male RJ-45 cable to connect
to the RJ-45 connector.

Other switches in the product family, such as the 3911, 3920, 3940, 3960, and
5140, support an EIA-232 connector requiring a DB-9 cable.

The console port connection settings are the same for all console ports, both
serial EIA-232 and serial EIA-561, within the Packet Networking portfolio.

You can use terminal emulation software (e.g. HyperTerminal) to connect to


the system. The initial settings should be as follows:
serial port VT-100 interface
9600 baud
8 bits
no parity
1 stop bit
no flow control
Default login
Once a connection has been established, the default login is as follows:
Username: su
Password: wwp

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
Console port overview 21-5

Procedures related to the initial configuration of a newly installed system are


located in the Hardware Installation and Start-up manual for each product. A
complete list of the available documents is provided in Documentation
roadmap on page 2-1.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
21-6 Console port overview

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals


SAOS 6.12 009-3240-006 Standard Revision A
Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation May 2014
39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches
Product Fundamentals

Copyright2013- 2014 Ciena Corporation. All rights reserved.

SAOS 6.12
Publication: 009-3240-006
Document status: Standard
Revision A
Document release date: May 2014

CONTACT CIENA
For additional information, office locations, and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena
web site at www.ciena.com